Uploaded by Fikre Hailu

PPT 2-5

advertisement
Knowledge Infrastructure, S.L. ©
Foster Infrastructure Pty Ltd ©
October 2020
This material is intellectual property of Knowledge
Infrastructure and Foster Infrastructure.
Dissemination of this material to any third party by
candidates or by the institution is not allowed without prior
consent by K-Infra in writing.
The APMG PPP Certification Program is a registered
Trade Mark of The APM Group Limited. All rights
reserved.
This document is subject to
intellectual property rights and it
its contents cannot be copied,
distributed or transferred without
prior explicit consent by K-infra.
CP3P – Practitioner
Course
Chapter 2
Establishing a PPP Framework
Prepared by
1
Learning objectives
• After studying this chapter, students should understand the
following:
̵ The value of having a PPP framework
̵ What a PPP framework should include
̵ How to set the objectives and scope of a PPP framework
̵ Ways to establish a PPP framework in different jurisdictions, taking account
of existing legal and administrative traditions
̵ The stages of a typical PPP process, and how the framework guides each
stage
̵ How roles and responsibilities for PPPs can be allocated effectively
between various government agencies
̵ Principles and techniques that facilitate responsible public financial
management of PPPs
̵ Ways to ensure appropriate oversight and transparency of PPP programs.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
2
Content
Purpose, benefits and objectives of a PPP Framework
Scope of the PPP Framework
Choice of Legal and Administrative Instruments to Create PPP
Framework
Defining the PPP Process
Institutional Responsibilities
Public Financial Management of PPPs
Oversight of PPP Programs and Projects
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
3
Introduction and Purpose
• A PPP framework:
̵ Is the established procedures, rules and institutional responsibilities that
determine how the government selects, implements and manages PPPs
̵ Establishes good PPP practice within the government
̵ Limits and manages government risk and ensures consistency
̵ Makes institutions accountable for their role in the PPP process
̵ Lets the market know how PPP projects will be developed, and how bids
will be assessed
̵ Ensures that the objectives of the public and private sector are aligned
̵ Establishes rules that avoid impropriety and promote the public interest in
getting quality projects done efficiently.
• This chapter explains how to create a new PPP framework, or
ensure an existing framework is effective.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
4
Purpose, benefits and
objectives of Frameworks
Guide Sections
#1, #2 & #3
5
Why have a PPP Framework? (1)
1
• A good PPP framework aims to ensure that:
̵ The right projects are selected as PPPs
̵ Projects are developed, delivered and managed in a structured,
transparent and efficient way.
• A good framework minimizes the risks that a PPP project will
not deliver Value for Money.
• PPPs involve multiple conflicting interests:
̵ If the procurement process fails to consider market conditions, the tender
process may not be competitive.
̵ But if risks are not allocated If risks are not allocated appropriately, the
public sector may incur costs that it cannot control and there will be.
̵ Unexpected fiscal obligations incurred by the government.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#1 Purpose, benefits and objectives
6
Why have a PPP Framework? (2)
1
• PPP frameworks address risks and increase the likelihood that
PPPs will succeed by:
• Standard practices reduce learning costs and the risk of
Increasing the capability of
mistakes, making it easier to transfer skills from one project
government agencies to deliver PPPs
to another project in another sector
Providing a structured way of
reconciling disparate objectives
• A framework can establish a common objective between
stakeholders improving the longevity of the PPP program
Making sure that whole-ofgovernment risk is limited
• A good framework has processes and responsibilities for
identifying and mitigating government reputation risk and
fiscal risks
Generating market interest
• A good PPP framework can communicate the quality of the
PPP program and government’s commitment to potential
investors, and reduce investors’ perception of risk
Facilitating probity and oversight of
the PPP program
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
• Having clear processes, decision making criteria, and
allocation of responsibilities makes such oversight more
effective [traceability and accountability are higher]
#1 Purpose, benefits and objectives
7
What is in a PPP Framework? (1)
2
• A PPP framework should guide governments and private
partners through each step in developing a PPP, ensuring
projects are well structured and delivered to meet expectations
̵ The PPP framework should contain procedures and decision rules, and
ensure effective public financial management and oversight.
• The framework should articulate its objectives:
̵ These make explicit what the government wants the PPP framework to
achieve, and provide a basis for subsequent evaluation of the framework.
• The framework should set out its scope:
̵ The types of projects to which it applies.
̵ It may be most effective for certain kinds of projects within certain sectors.
• The PPP framework will often be embodied in PPP specific
policy documents or legislation.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#1 Purpose, benefits and objectives
8
What is in a PPP Framework? (2)
2
• PPP frameworks typically define:
̵ Procedures: What things need to be done, by whom, in what order, to
allow the right decision to be made and the right actions to be taken?
̵ Decision criteria: How will decisions be made at each step?
̵ Institutional responsibilities: Which entities are responsible for which
tasks and objectives?
• The PPP framework should set also out:
̵ How fiscal commitments are managed
̵ How proper oversight for the program is established.
• Each of these elements is discussed in more detail later in this
chapter.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#1 Purpose, benefits and objectives
9
Objectives of the PPP Framework (1)
- The importance of objectives
3
• A structured and programmatic approach to PPPs can attract
stronger and more consistent interest from the private sector:
̵ A PPP program may be defined as the ways in which the government plans
to use PPPs to achieve improved infrastructure service provision
oGoes beyond the pipeline to include additional and not yet identified projects
oMay include indications of priority sectors in which PPPs are expected to be used,
and the extent to which the government plans to use PPPs (rather than other
service delivery mechanisms) in general or in particular sectors
• The framework should promote effective, efficient and
sustainable delivery of the PPP program:
̵ The framework is not an end in itself but a means to an end.
• Governments should define PPP program objectives as a first
step in developing the PPP framework:
̵ The objectives give direction to the designers of the framework
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#1 Purpose, benefits and objectives
10
Objectives of the PPP Framework (2)
- Common objectives
3
• The choice of objectives depends on the government’s policies
and priorities. They can include:
̵ Enabling more investment in infrastructure by increasing project financing
options
̵ Achieving Value for Money in the provision of infrastructure and public
services
̵ Improving accountability in the provision of infrastructure and public
services
̵ Harnessing private sector innovation and efficiency
̵ Ensuring that the long-term delivery and management of PPPs is
sustainable, especially when stakeholders change over time (political
actors, champions, representatives in ministries or PPP units)
̵ Stimulating growth and development in the country.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#1 Purpose, benefits and objectives
11
Objectives of the PPP Framework (3)
- Don’t use PPPs for the wrong reasons
3
• The PPP framework should reduce the risk that PPPs are used
for the wrong reasons:
̵ Some governments have used PPPs to reduce reported levels of
government expenditure and borrowing, even when the long-term fiscal
implications of the PPP projects are similar to those of a publicly financed
project
̵ The framework should ensure PPPs are used to achieve substantial
benefits, not to manipulate accounting results
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#1 Purpose, benefits and objectives
12
Quiz - PPP Framework Objectives
1-Which of the following are true?
1.
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Different PPP Programs should have different objectives
Defining objectives is the final step in the development of a PPP
framework
Only 1 is true
Only 2 is true
Both 1 and 2 are true
Neither 1 nor 2 is true
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#1 Purpose, benefits and objectives
13
Quiz - PPP Framework
2-Which of the following are true?
1.
2.
3.
4.
A.
B.
C.
D.
PPP frameworks typically define Procedures, Decision Criteria and
Institutional Responsibilities
The PPP framework should aim to reduce the risk that PPPs are used for
the wrong reasons
A PPP program is basically the same as a pipeline with concrete dates
and a commitment to tender a number of projects
A structured and programmatic approach to PPPs can attract stronger
and more consistent interest from the private sector
1, 2, 3 and 4 are true
Only 1, 2, 3 are true
Only 2, 3 and 4 are true
Only 1, 2 and 4 are true
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#1 Purpose, benefits and objectives
14
2
Scope of the PPP Framework
Guide Sections
#4
15
Scope of the PPP Framework – Introduction
4
• The scope of the PPP framework indicates the types of projects
the framework will apply to.
• The scope is generally defined by four dimensions:
̵ Jurisdiction
̵ Sector
̵ Size
̵ Contract type
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#2 Scope of Frameworks
16
Scope of the PPP Framework: Dimensions Jurisdiction
4
Federal Systems
• A Federal government framework can only extend to PPPs that fall within the
federal government’s competence .
• Frameworks in Federal systems are often developed at the sub-national level.
• Federal funding mechanisms can assist PPPs at lower levels of government.
Non-Federal Systems
• The national government may promulgate a framework.
• Sub-national governments may also develop frameworks for sectors within
their competence.
Local Government PPPs
• Extent of national control varies from country to country.
• In federal systems, there may be state to state variations in how the
framework applies to local government.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#2 Scope of Frameworks
17
Scope of the PPP Framework: Dimensions Sector
4
• If the government intends to focus on PPPs in just a few sectors,
the framework may be designed with these sectors in mind:
̵ The application of the framework may even be explicitly limited to those
sectors.
oExamples:
–South Africa: PPP framework created explicitly for highways (as well as a separate, more
tailored framework for other PPPs)
–Philippines: special regime for privately-financed power plants.
• Other frameworks may cover multiple sectors, but still set
limits.
oExample:
–Singapore’s PPP policy (2004) limited its scope to those sectors “in which other similar
countries have had proven success with PPP”
–Countries that explicitly exclude certain sectors (like health)
• Some frameworks have no limits on the sectors to which they
can apply.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#2 Scope of Frameworks
18
Scope of the PPP Framework: Dimensions –
Size
4
• The relatively high transaction costs of implementing a PPP can
make PPPs below a certain size unviable:
̵ Many governments therefore define a minimum size (or value) for PPP
projects
̵ Examples:
–Singapore’s PPP policy (2004): PPPs will be pursued only if they have an estimated capital
value of over US$50 million
–Brazil’s PPP law: Minimum size of 20 million reals (USD 11.7 million) for individual projects.
• Some jurisdictions bundle small projects to economize on
transaction costs:
̵ Example:
–Pennsylvania Bridges Project: Rehabilitation of 558 bridges bundled into one large project
• PPP size limits may change over time as the government
improves its understanding of the size of suitable projects.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#2 Scope of Frameworks
19
Scope of the PPP Framework: Dimensions Contract Type
4
• Many frameworks are explicitly limited to a particular subset of
the range of possible PPP contracts
̵ Some limit the types of contracts permitted or in scope of the framework
–For example, PPP framework may only contemplate government pays or the opposite.
–Certain obligations / scope of contract may be excluded (e.g. in Ecuador private sector may
not be in charge of water supply service)
̵ Some limit the duration of contracts
–Example: European (EU) general legislation limiting PPP / concession contracts up to 40
years
• Others allow PPPs of any type within a single framework
• Typically, the legal traditions of the country influence the type
of contracts the PPP framework applies to (for example,
government-pays, user-pays, or both)
̵ Examples:
–The scope of the UK's Private Finance Initiative (PFI) program has been predominantly
government-pays contracts, with minimal user-pays elements
–The French PPP framework was originally framed around user-pays concession contracts.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#2 Scope of Frameworks
20
Scope of the PPP Framework – advantages and
disadvantages of Unified Frameworks
4
• Countries with established PPP programs, often apply PPP
frameworks across all sectors and even across multiple
jurisdictions within a country (federal, state and local)
Advantages
Disadvantages
• Simplicity for government agencies and investors
• Efficiency
• Consistency: Many PPP issues are the same regardless of the sector or jurisdiction
• Difficult to develop and inflexible to change
• Unable to address unique infrastructure challenges
• ‘Parallel’ PPP frameworks within a single jurisdiction can
deliver PPP programs that target specific objectives
–Example: Spain has a specific sectoral law for water which incorporates specific regulations
for water PPPs including a longer permitted duration of contracts
• Alternatively, an ‘umbrella’ policy can be developed, which
then has sector specific versions or detail
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#2 Scope of Frameworks
21
Quiz - PPP Framework Scope
3-Which of the following is correct?
A. If a PPP Framework prescribes a minimum value of $20
million for PPPs, school buildings costing $2 million each
cannot be delivered as PPPs
B. A PPP Framework can apply to a single sector, or to multiple
sectors
C. A PPP Framework should be developed first by the National
government, and then applied to lower levels of government
D. The PPP Framework must state only a specific type of PPP
contract that may be used
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#2 Scope of Frameworks
22
3
Legal and Administrative
Approaches to create a PPP
Framework
Guide Sections
#5
23
Legal and Administrative Approaches Introduction
5
• PPP frameworks need to be:
̵ Documented; and
̵ Enforced
• In developing enforcement mechanisms, governments need to
consider:
̵ How will the PPP framework be made binding on government officials?
̵ How will the PPP framework be communicated to all stakeholders?
̵ What will give legal force to PPP agreements?
• How frameworks are documented and given force varies widely
between jurisdictions:
̵ Some are enacted as laws, others are policy documents and manuals.
• PPP frameworks also build on, and incorporate, many preexisting public sector management frameworks.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
24
Legal and Administrative Approaches
- Impact of Legal Traditions
Common Law
countries
Civil Law
countries
Tend to rely on policy documents
and administrative guidance
materials
More likely to enact the framework
in statute law and use detailed rules
and regulations with legal force
Longer history of government-pays
PPPs than civil law countries
Long history of user-pays PPPs
(often termed “Concessions”)
User-pays PPPs are a more recent
development
Government-pays PPPs are a more
recent adaption from common law
countries
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
5
25
Legal and Administrative Approaches –
Common Law Countries
5
• Governments in these countries generally don’t need laws to
establish PPP frameworks or enter into PPP contracts:
̵ In these countries, policy statements and administrative documents are
often the best approach.
oExamples:
–Britain: HM Treasury sets PPP policy (just for England)
– Australia: National PPP Policy has been agreed to by the Federal government and each
state and territory government; departures from the policy and guidelines are possible, but
must be approved by the relevant PPP authority (usually treasury or finance)
–Jamaica: PPP policy was adopted by the cabinet, and then published; The Development
Bank of Jamaica was mandated with managing the implementation of the policy.
̵ Many common law countries have Westminster system governments, with
the executive accountable for policies in parliament and through elections.
̵ In these countries, PPPs are usually private law contracts, adjudicated and
enforced through the courts or contractual arbitration.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
26
Legal and Administrative Approaches - Common
Law Countries (continued)
5
• Some common law jurisdictions do create PPP laws
̵ Why?:
oTo override existing laws that would otherwise restrict or delay PPP projects; or
oTo provide greater force, stability, transparency, and accountability
̵ Examples:
–US States: PPP laws create exceptions to other state laws already on the books that prevent
PPP contracts; and provide stability and legislative control in systems of government where
there is a strict separation of legislative and executive power, unlike the Westminster
system.
–Kenya; States in India: PPP laws increase accountability and transparency of the program,
provide greater policy stability, and signal stronger commitment to investors and funding
agencies.
̵ Disadvantages: Longer time to pass a law; loss of flexibility; difficulty of
coordination between the legislature and the executive.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
27
Legal and Administrative Approaches - Civil Law
Countries
5
• Civil law countries tend to embody PPP frameworks in laws
̵ In civil law tradition, government agencies may only do what they are
explicitly authorized to do.
̵ Civil law limits government discretion with defined rules.
̵ The types of law used differ from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
oExamples:
–Spain: PPPs are empowered and controlled through the public procurement law .
–Chile: Controls all PPPs through its concession law.
–The Philippines: Special BOT Law evolved into a PPP law.
–France: “Government-pays” PPP contracts were authorized and controlled by a specific
statute.
• Some civil law countries subject PPP contracts to special
administrative law provisions, others treated them as private
law contracts
–Turkey: certain contracts are established as private law contracts.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
28
Legal and Administrative Approaches - Dispute
resolution
5
• The PPP framework should be explicit about mechanisms that
are used to reduce the need for court action
̵ Why?
oCourt processes can be slow and expensive
oJudges are not familiar with the complex and technical matters involved in PPP
contracts
̵ It is often a good idea to include alternative dispute resolution
mechanisms in contracts, such as mediation, [dispute resolution boards
DRB] and arbitration provisions
̵ Enforcement mechanisms that reduce the need for court action, such as
escrow accounts and performance bonds, can also be useful tools.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
29
Building on and Incorporating Pre-Existing
Government Frameworks (1)
5
• A PPP framework is not constructed in isolation
̵ It builds on, incorporates, and modifies pre-existing frameworks
• It makes sense to use existing frameworks as far as possible
and to ensure that PPP-specific elements dovetail with existing
systems
• It is good practice to review the legislative and administrative
context to ensure that it is not incompatible with key elements
of the objectives of the PPP framework
̵ Examples:
–In Brazil and India there are taxation rules which discriminate against private sector
subcontracting of operations and maintenance in PPPs
–Discrimination against foreign investors (for example, convertibility, confiscatory taxes on
repatriation of equity) should be reviewed in order to attract the participation of
international/global investors and developers.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
30
Building on and Incorporating Pre-Existing
Government Frameworks (2)
5
• Pre-existing frameworks that may be relevant include:
̵ Administrative law: In many civil law countries, government agencies are
governed by administrative laws.
̵ Procurement law: PPP transaction processes must typically comply with
public procurement law and regulations, unless PPPs are exempt.
–Example: In Ecuador PPPs are exempted of application of procurement/tender regulations
for public works and services.
̵ Public financial management law: May regulate matters such as project
approval requirements, fiscal limits, budgeting and reporting requirements.
̵ Sector laws and regulatory frameworks: These frameworks may:
oConstrain the government’s ability to contract with the private sector, or provide
rules for doing so – for example:
–Concessions for utility services may be governed by public utility regulation: typically the
case with energy or water.
–Essential infrastructure may be subject to open access rules under competition law.
oAffect tariffs and service regulation, and set out the role of regulatory agencies,
and how these interact with the terms of the PPP contract.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
31
Building on and Incorporating Pre-Existing
Government Frameworks (3)
5
• Other rules affecting private firms will apply to companies
involved in PPP projects, and should therefore be considered
̵ Examples:
–Environmental law and regulations
–Laws and regulations governing land acquisition and ownership
–Licensing requirements, particularly for international firms
–Tax rules
–Employment law
–Accounting standards.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
32
Quiz - Legal and Administrative Approaches
4-Which of the following is correct?
A. In civil law countries, a specific PPP Law is required to enable
government to undertake PPPs
B. In common law countries, government-pays PPPs are usually
a more recent development than user-pays PPPs
C. A PPP Framework doesn’t need to take into account
conflicting laws or policies
D. The PPP Framework should include mechanisms to prevent
disputes going to court
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
33
Framework for Sub-National PPPs
- Introduction
5
• Where there are multiple levels of government, one level may
wish to empower, influence, or control a lower level of
government
̵ In federal systems, national governments may wish to affect the legal
framework for states
̵ National and state governments may also wish to enable, control or
influence local government entering into PPPs.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
34
Framework for Sub-National PPPs
- Federal Systems
5
• In federal systems, constitutions normally specify which matters
are the preserves of states, and which of the federal
government.
̵ PPP frameworks at the state level therefore apply to PPPs that are within
state competencies.
̵ Federal rules apply to PPP projects that are within federal competencies
and executed by the federal government.
• Federal government constitutions generally restrict them from
intruding on how state governments discharge matters within
the state’s competence.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
35
Framework for Sub-National PPPs
- Local Government
5
• State or national governments can usually legislate with
respect to the behaviour of local governments within their
jurisdictions
̵ There are a variety of approaches to applying state or national PPP
frameworks at the local level, for example:
–In Spain, PPPs done by local authorities have to respect the national general procurement
legislation, as well as a specific law regulating municipal service procurement.
–In Australia and Canada, the national PPP policy does not apply to local government: PPPs
are rare at the local level due to the small size of projects developed at this level
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
36
Framework for Sub-National PPPs
- Incentivizing Sub-National PPPs
5
• Governments can also incentivize lower level PPPs through intergovernmental fiscal transfers rather than laws. Examples:
–United States: the Transportation Infrastructure Finance and Innovation Act (TIFIA) incentivizes state
governments transport PPPs by offering concessional finance in the form of direct loans, loan
guarantees, and standby lines of credit
–Canada: Federal funding of provincial and municipal PPPs comes with requirements as to how projects
are structured and managed.
–Ecuador: central government provides “fiscal incentives” to PPPs promoted by sub-national governments
by exempting the SPV to pay corporate taxes and enjoying other incentives (import duties, VAT etc).
• Such incentives are not always efficient
–In Britain, “PFI credits” paid by the National government to local authorities as grants to support local
PPP projects were criticized and abolished (in 2010) as they discriminate procurement in favour of PPPs
by giving additional spending power local authorities just for PPPs.
• Investors often consider local governments to be less reliable counterparts
due to lower credit ratings or limited resources.
̵ This can create a role for national governments to provide financial or technical
support to local governments (possibly accompanied by a desire to control such
PPPs).
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
37
The role of Sub-national PPPs
- Examples (1)
• Australia:
̵ Most large-scale infrastructure development is a state responsibility
̵ State governments were instrumental in the development of a national
PPP policy framework, which has been endorsed by all states and territory,
as well as the federal government
• Canada:
̵ Most infrastructure development is a provincial government responsibility
̵ PPP frameworks are developed at the provincial level, without federal
oversight
̵ The federal government can however influence the delivery of provincial
PPP programs by financing local and municipal PPP projects through the P3
Canada Fund
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
38
The role of Sub-national PPPs
- Examples (2)
• India:
̵ India’s Union Government, through the PPP cell in the Department of
Economic Affairs, leads the development of the PPP framework.
oThe PPP cell is responsible for all PPP matters, including policy, schemes,
programs, and capacity building
̵ State governments also have the right to enact their own PPP legislation
oSeveral states including Andhra Pradesh , Gujarat, and Karnataka have created
their own PPP frameworks and have successfully developed their PPP projects.
• US:
̵ The national government is responsible for very little infrastructure
̵ PPP frameworks are created by state governments
̵ There is no federal level PPP framework.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
39
Quiz - Sub-national and local PPPs
5-Which of the following are correct?
1.
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
A PPP Framework should be created at the national level and also
applied to any projects undertaken at a Sub-national or local level.
National governments can provide financial or technical support to PPPs
undertaken at a Sub-national or local level.
Only 1 is correct.
Only 2 is correct.
Both 1 and 2 are correct.
Neither 1 nor 2 is correct.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#3 Legal & administrative
40
4
Defining the PPP Process:
decision criteria, procedures
and institutional
responsabilities
Guide Sections
#6
41
Defining the PPP Process
- Introduction
6
• The framework should provide guidance on each stage of
developing and implementing a PPP project:
̵ From initially identifying candidate projects.
̵ To managing PPP contracts throughout the project lifecycle.
• The Framework should ensure that only ‘good’ PPP projects
are developed:
̵ PPPs should be cost-benefit justified, provide better Value for Money than
traditional public procurement, financially viable and fiscally responsible,
and attractive to the market.
̵ These criteria cannot be fully assessed until the PPP is fully designed and
structured, but this is costly.
̵ Successful PPP programs tackle this problem through progressively more
rigorous screening at successive stages of project development.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
42
Defining the PPP Process
- Overview
6
• This section introduces the key decision criteria, procedures,
and institutional responsibilities that should be considered
across the PPP process:
̵ Details on the specific tasks at each step are provided in the chapters 3 to 8
of the PPP Guide and an overview of the process is provided in chapter 1.
• These are simply basic guidelines, noting that:
̵ There are many subtleties in the PPP process.
̵ What works well in one culture or public administrative system may not
work as well in others.
̵ Local circumstances and how the public sector works should be
understood before adopting practices from elsewhere.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
43
Identification of Projects and Screening
(1)
6
• The process starts with project origination
̵ It follows the same or uses a similar process as for originating public sector
investment projects [they are in fact public investments!]
̵ Projects are screened for their potential suitability as PPPs.
̵ Screening at this stage is usually indicative, limited to the information
available at relatively low cost.
• Decision criteria
̵ The project should fit in with a broader plan for the sector.
̵ The project should meet PPP program objectives.
̵ The project should be economically viable and fiscally responsible:
oProjects should not proceed unless they are economically sound.
oProjects that may impose costs or incur liabilities that are beyond the financial
capability of the government should be avoided.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
44
Identification of Projects and Screening
(2)
6
• Procedures and institutional responsibility
̵ The PPP framework should identify the following:
oWho proposes PPP projects?
oCan only government entities with investment programs submit a proposal?
oCan private proponents also put forward proposals for PPP projects?
̵ The framework should identify who approves further development of PPP
projects.
oSuccessful PPP projects typically require the support of:
1. the line agency, that is, the department initiating the project.
2. the finance ministry.
3. other central authorities.
̵ The framework should identify the level of documentation required to be
submitted to the stakeholders involved in approving the project
proceeding, so that an informed decision is made.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
45
Appraise the Project (1) - Introduction to Appraisal
6
• Candidate projects that survive the “screening” are then
developed and appraised
̵ This is an iterative, or multi-stage, process
̵ The appraisal report, often called a “Business Case” or “Full Feasibility
Study”, is typically the basis for approval to proceed with the PPP
transaction
• The PPP Guide assumes that the investment decision and the
procurement decision are considered as part of the same
process
̵ This requires that the government either:
oEstablish requirements for the systematic appraisal of all projects
–This requires wide-scale government support and may be impractical
oEstablish a requirement for the appraisal of PPP projects
–Makes PPPs subject to greater scrutiny than non-PPP projects
–Ensures only worthwhile projects are implemented as PPPs
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
46
Appraise the Project (2) - Decision Criteria
6
• The Investment Decision: A project is a “good project” if it is:
̵ Economically, technically, environmentally and legally feasible:
oAll projects, PPP or not, should demonstrate that they are ‘good’ projects
oSpecialist skills are required to undertake such an appraisal
̵ Affordable:
oShould be assessed from both the government and user perspectives
–Government liabilities, direct and contingent, must be within budget constraints
–Services provided by the PPP need to be affordable to the users
• The Procurement Decision: The project is suitable to be a PPP
if:
̵ It is commercial viable (and bankable):
oThe project must be able to generate returns to the investor and enable investors
to raise debt from lenders
̵ The project is expected to deliver Value for Money as a PPP:
oA PPP is considered Value for Money if the project is expected to deliver higher
net economic benefits if done as a PPP.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
47
Appraise the Project (3) - Assessing Value for
Money
6
• There are many ways of assessing Value for Money:
̵ Traditional approach (developed in the UK):
oDetermine whether a PPP will have a lower (risk-adjusted) cost to the
government than a conventional procurement
̵ Alternative approach:
oDetermine which delivery option will maximize benefits for a given budget
–E.g. in New Zealand, the test is which approach is likely to deliver greater net economic
benefits
• Value for Money assessment is usually qualitative during initial
screening and then quantified during full appraisal
̵ Quantitative Value for Money analyses are necessarily based on
assumptions and forecasts, hence their accuracy is limited
̵ Some jurisdictions (e.g. Canada) also use qualitative indicators to select a
procurement option
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
48
Appraise the Project (4) - Procedures &
institutional responsibility
6
• The PPP framework should specify:
̵ The required content of the PPP appraisal or of the “feasibility study”– this
includes:
oThe studies that need to be done (for example, demand forecasts).
oThe questions that need to be answered to determine if a project is economically,
financially, technically, environmentally, and legally feasible [i.e. the feasibility
criteria].
̵ Who approves the PPP appraisal:
oAny PPP project will require the support of numerous stakeholders to be
successful.
oThe PPP framework should identify the approval process needed for proceeding
to the next phase.
–Many jurisdictions require a decision by the cabinet in favour of proceeding.
–Others delegate the decision to a government agency [or a committee/commission],
perhaps with the assent of one or more central agencies or a PPP unit.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
49
Structure the Procurement Process and Project
Contract (1) - Introduction
6
• Before the PPP transaction can be implemented, the tender
documents and the draft PPP contract need to be prepared.
• The tender documents should include the evaluation criteria
and proposal requirements.
• The contract should fully define the outputs, responsibilities,
and risk allocation.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
50
Structure the Procurement Process and Project
Contract (1) - Introduction
6
• Before the PPP transaction can be implemented, the tender
documents and the draft PPP contract need to be prepared.
Tender Documents
• Should include
the evaluation
criteria and
proposal
requirements (as
well as
information on
the project)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
Contract
• Should fully
define the
outputs,
responsibilities,
and risk
allocation
#4 Defining PPP Process
51
Structure the Procurement Process and Project
Contract (2) – “Decision Criteria”
6
•  All significant risks should be identified and allocated to the
most appropriate party
̵ The success of a PPP lies in how well risks have been allocated.
̵ If risks are not allocated appropriately, the project will cost more than
necessary
•  The framework should ensure that appropriate risk
management plans can be developed.
̵ For those risks allocated to the public sector (example: RoW!), appropriate
plans need to be in place that both minimize the likelihood of the risk
occurring and the impact in case the risk does occur.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
52
Structure the Procurement & Contract (3)
– Procedures & institutional responsibility
6
• The Framework should specify:
̵  Approaches to risk allocation, risk management plans and draft
contracts.
oSome governments have standardized rules about risk allocation, others look at
each project on a case-by-case basis.
oDrafting contracts requires the expertise of experienced PPP lawyers. Agencies
without this experience in-house will need to secure it by using outside counsel.
–For example, British Columbia brought in lawyers and technical advisors from Australia and
the UK, jurisdictions with established PPP frameworks.
̵  Guidelines for procurement
oDocument the standard PPP procurement process.
oThis will signal to prospective partners how they can be involved and reduce the
likelihood of disputes.
o“Model” and “Standard” contracts can ensure consistency in the design of PPP
contracts, while sending clear messages to the market.
̵  How to gain approval for proceeding to the next phase (the tender
process)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
53
Structuring (4) – Standard and Model Contracts
6
Standard Contract
• A contract that public
agencies are required to use
(or at least required to
document and justify any
deviations from it)
• May not be a full set of all
provisions in the contract,
but rather a set of
recommendations (including
alternative approaches for
some issues) in the form of
guidelines
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
Model contract
• An example contract that
embodies good practice and
is available for agencies to
use
#4 Defining PPP Process
54
Structuring (5) – Advantages/Disadvantages of
Standard and Model Contracts
Advantages
• If done well, model or standard contracts:
• Reduce the risk of the contract being
wrong (for example, poorly drafted or
with an inappropriate risk allocation)
• Save time and money for the bidders
by reducing the time required to
understand each contract
• Enable the project team to focus their
work on developing and tailoring
existing processes and legal
documentation, rather than drafting
contracts from scratch
• Reducing the time required for caseby-case negotiations as both parties
have an expectation of what is
acceptable.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
6
Disadvantages
• It is hard to write one contract that will
apply to a wide range of different deals.
• Therefore, using standard contracts may
reduce the quality of contracts compared
to having experienced advisors develop a
specific contract for each project.
#4 Defining PPP Process
55
Structuring (6) – Should a Standard or Model
Contract be developed?
6
• Jurisdictions should strike the right balance between
standardization and customization.
̵ If most of the projects will be fairly similar (for example, all governmentpays contracts for social infrastructure) then a single standard contract
may make sense.
̵ If there are various categories of projects envisaged, standard contracts for
each category may be warranted.
̵ If a wide range of different deals are expected, one or two model
contracts, coupled with some standard for contract drafting, may be best.
oStandards for contract drafting could include preferred risks allocations, a list of
topics that should be addressed in all contracts, and sample provisions for some
topics that are likely to be similar across multiple contract types (such as
extraordinary adjustments, force majeure, dispute resolution, and termination
provisions).
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
56
Tender and Award (1) – Introduction
6
• A well designed and implemented procurement is central to
achieving Value for Money from the PPP.
• The process will include [and the guidelines to be developed in
a proper framework may cover these aspects]:
̵ marketing the PPP.
̵ checking the qualifications of bidders.
̵ inviting and evaluating proposals.
̵ interacting with bidders during the process.
̵ selecting the preferred bidder.
̵ concluding the contract.
• Stakeholder engagement is essential to this and all other stages,
but the Guide develops here some key aspects.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
57
Tender and Award (2) – Stakeholder engagement
6
• Risks of inadequate stakeholder consultation:
̵ The contract may not be acceptable to the private sector and its lenders,
resulting in no bids.
̵ Lack of public support for the project may result in it being cancelled by
the next elected government.
̵ Public demonstrations, labour union action, or public boycotts may result
in delayed implementation or reduced profitability.
• The PPP Framework can include a policy on stakeholder
engagement, addressing concepts like:
• Stakeholder identification and
analysis.
• Information disclosure.
• Stakeholder consultation.
• Negotiation and partnerships.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
• Grievance management.
• Stakeholder involvement in project
monitoring.
• Reporting to stakeholders.
• Management functions.
#4 Defining PPP Process
58
Tender and Award (3) – The tender decision
6
• Only at the end of the tender process will the government
know the final cost of the PPP project and other terms.
̵ At this point there may be a final check to ensure the project still meets
the PPP criteria.
̵ However cancelling a project (e.g. because it is not expected to offer VFM,
or is not affordable) at this point is undesirable and can damage the
market reputation of the jurisdiction.
oUnless the market has confidence that the project will proceed, the private sector
will be unlikely to spend money preparing a bid.
̵ So the PPP framework should set out in advance the circumstances under
which a project will not proceed.
–Example, in some jurisdictions (such as British Columbia, Canada, or commonly in EU),
“affordability ceilings” are revealed to ensure the market knows the maximum that the
public sector is willing to pay.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
59
Tender and Award (4) – “Decision Criteria”
6
• To test if the procurement was appropriate, the following
criteria are helpful:
̵  Was the procurement competitive?
oFor example, have most qualified private partners heard about the opportunity?
The competition will only be as good as those competing.
oHave qualified private partners been given ample opportunity to express their
interest and develop proposals? If timelines are too short, or processes too
onerous, private partners will avoid becoming involved
̵  Has the process been transparent and conducted with integrity and
fairness?
oThe way that the award process is administered should be clearly communicated
and responsibilities clearly allocated.
oThe criteria for award should be transparent, with well-defined and objective,
qualification criteria, technical specifications, and bidding requirements.
oThe tender process should ensure that all bidders are treated fairly.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
60
Tender and Award (5) – Procedures and
Institutional Responsibility
Process
Procedures
Institutional responsibilities
• PPP marketing
• Evaluation of
qualifications (and
short-listing if that
occurs)
• Evaluation of
proposals
The framework should
provide guidance on how to
ensure the process is
smoothly delivered and that
common pitfalls are
avoided, without being
prescriptive.
The framework should state
who evaluates, who makes the
selection decision, and who
approves the contract.
• Reaching
commercial close
The framework should give
guidance on the extent of
negotiations permitted to
reach commercial close.
As above, the framework
should state who approves the
contract.
• Reaching financial
close
The framework should
address the risk of delays
and contractual changes in
getting to financial close.
The framework should state:
• who manages this process
for government
• who approves any changes
to the contract necessary
to reach financial close.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
6
61
Manage the Contract (1) – Introduction
6
• This is the longest phase of the project
• The challenge is to ensure the PPP provides Value for Money
throughout the contract, both construction and operations
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
62
Manage the Contract (2) – “Decision Criteria”
6
• The PPP framework should:
̵ Ensure that issues during construction and service delivery are
communicated by the concessionaire to the implementing agency, and, if
required, to relevant central government agencies.
̵ Include a strong operations team and governance mechanisms for
reviewing performance and escalating issues to better equip the
government to manage the PPP and make hard decisions
̵ Include governance mechanisms to help the government agency to be a
good working partner which private parties can have confidence.
• The Framework should help to deal with unexpected events
after contract execution, without a need for contract
renegotiation.
• Sometimes renegotiation may be required.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
63
Manage the Contract (3) – Renegotiation
6
• In circumstances where renegotiation may be required, the PPP
framework should:
̵ Ensure the renegotiation process is carefully managed by the government,
with proper resources and a proper governance structure. The objective of
renegotiation should be to secure an outcome that meets the objectives of
the public sector better than would adherence to the original contract
terms.
̵ Allow for changes in the risk allocation if this is necessary and offers a net
benefit when compared to alternatives such as cancellation of the
contract.
̵ Recognise that advisors may need to be re-engaged at this stage.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
64
Manage the Contract (4) – Procedures and
Institutional Responsibility
6
• PPP contracts are typically managed by the relevant line
agency.
• Central agencies will also need to be informed of emerging
issues and risks.
• The PPP framework should set out how the line agency and
relevant central agencies should communicate.
• The framework should also specify how contracts should be
completed or terminated.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
65
Quiz - Defining the PPP Process
6-Which of the following is correct?
A. The government should investigate a project in as much
detail as possible before selecting it as a potential PPP for
appraisal.
B. The PPP Framework should prohibit renegotiation of
contracts, as renegotiation is not in the public interest.
C. The PPP Framework should define in very precise terms how
the tender process is to be conducted and how bids are to be
evaluated.
D. Using standard contracts may reduce the quality of contracts
compared to having experienced advisors develop a specific
contract for each project.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
66
Privately Initiated Projects (1) – Introduction
6
• Some governments accept unsolicited or privately-initiated PPP
projects:
̵ Governments can harness information and ideas that private firms have
about how to provide services, but allowing firms to promote their own
project ideas is tricky.
oIf the idea is then put out to competitive tender, firms may not volunteer good
ideas since they cannot benefit from doing so.
oNot putting the idea out to competitive tender could allow a firm to charge more
than the cost for a service, leading to allegations of favouritism.
• The PPP framework needs to strike the right balance between:
̵ providing incentives to private proponents to submit high-quality project
ideas
̵ deterring poor quality proposals
̵ ensuring competitive tension, and
̵ demonstrating transparency.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
67
Privately Initiated Projects (2) – Benefits and
Pitfalls
Benefits
Pitfalls
• Allow governments to benefit from the
knowledge and ideas of the private sector.
• A significant advantage where limited
government capacity means the private
sector is better able to identify
infrastructure bottlenecks and innovative
solutions.
• Provides government with information about
where commercial opportunities and market
interest lie.
• Government must devote resources to
assessing and procuring unsolicited
proposals.
• Resources might be better allocated to
projects known to be in line with
government plans and priorities.
• Negotiating on an unsolicited proposal – with
no transparent or competitive procurement
process – can create problems.
• May result in poor Value for Money, due to
lack of competitive tension.
• May provide opportunities for corruption
and give rise to complaints about the
fairness of the process, especially if there is
no competitive process.
• For these reasons, some countries prohibit
the use of unsolicited proposals for PPPs.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
6
68
Privately Initiated Projects (3) – Creating
Competitive Tension
6
• Some jurisdictions have developed mechanisms to take
advantage of unsolicited proposals, while also introducing
competitive tension.
• Approaches include:
̵ Swiss challenge – an open bidding process is conducted. If the proponent
does not win, it is invited to match the winning bid and win the contract.
̵ Bid bonus – the proponent receives a scoring advantage typically defined
as an additional percentage added to its evaluation score in an open
bidding process.
̵ Inclusion in best and final offer round – a two-stage bid process, with
short-listing, is used. The proponent of the unsolicited proposal is
automatically included in the second stage.
̵ Developer’s fee – the proponent is paid a fee by the government or the
winning bidder. The fee may reimburse some project development costs,
or provide a return on developing the project concept.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
69
Privately Initiated Projects (4) – Dealing with
Intellectual Property
6
• To encourage unsolicited proposals, the government needs to
commit to protecting intellectual property:
̵ Otherwise, there is little incentive for the private party to invest in any new
or innovative ideas.
̵ Possible approaches:
oCompetitively tender the project by specifying required outputs, and not the
required technology to deliver those outputs. This approach is consistent with
good practice in defining output-based performance requirements for PPPs.
oIf the intellectual property is crucial to the project, such that it could not be
implemented otherwise, direct negotiation may be warranted, along with
procedures to benchmark project costs.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
70
Privately Initiated Projects (5) – Clear processes
6
• Clear processes for handling unsolicited proposals (USP) are
important for transparency and achieving Value for Money.
• Clear processes:
̵ assist the government in managing such a proposal
̵ incentivize private developers to invest resources in developing good
quality project proposals
̵ encourage competitors to engage in the bidding process.
• See figure 2.1 in the Guide for an example of an USP process.
• It is worth considering specifying time periods within which
each step in the process will be taken:
̵ Specific deadlines for government actions can provide assurance to the
private sector that their proposal will not languish in the process
̵ However tight limits on the time allowed for competing proposals can
deter competition.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
71
Quiz - Privately Initiated Projects
7-A PPP Framework states that the government can enter
(directly) into a contract with a party that proposes a privately
initiated project in any of the following circumstances:
1.
2.
If the project provides benefits to the community; or
If the private proponent owns intellectual property that is crucial to the
project, such that it could not be implemented otherwise.
How could this Framework be improved?
A. Delete or amend paragraph 1, as the fact the project will provide
benefits to the community is an insufficient reason, by itself, to accept
such a proposal.
B. Delete or amend paragraph 2, because the government should buy the
intellectual property and then put the project out to tender.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#4 Defining PPP Process
72
5
Institutional Responsibilities
Guide Sections
#7
73
Institutional Responsibilities - Introduction
7
• Institutional responsibilities define which entity will play what
role at each step of the process.
• Institutional arrangements differ widely from place to place.
̵ This depends on the particular needs of the PPP program and the preexisting institutional roles and capacities.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
74
Institutional Responsibilities – General Principles
7
• General principles for effective PPP institutional arrangements:
̵  Build on existing institutional responsibilities and processes;
oThere will already be sector agencies with responsibility for planning and
developing projects, which should generally continue in their existing role.
oExisting public sector procurement rules and public financial management rules
will provide the background framework which can be tailored to allow and
support the development of PPPs.
̵  Design the institutional architecture appropriately for the likely scale of
the task;
̵  Develop policies and architectures in parallel with the first projects;
̵  Assign responsibilities to agencies that have the incentives, information,
and competence to discharge the responsibilities and clearly define any
institutional relationships; and
̵  Avoid creating overlaps and additional coordination needs.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
75
Institutional Responsibilities – Typical
Responsibilities (1)
7
Identifying and procuring projects
• Driving projects forward:
• Identifying potential projects, appraising, structuring, drafting the contract, tendering the project,
managing the contract
Ensuring coordination and best practice approaches
• Ensuring that:
• correct processes are followed
• analysis of a proposed PPP is complete
• all the agencies that need to comment or give their go ahead do so
• the body with approval authority receives all the information it needs to make a sound decision
Public financial management
• Ensuring that there is sufficient fiscal space to fund direct liabilities
• Dealing with situations where risks allocated to the public sector crystallize into fiscal expenditures
Approving projects
• Giving the go ahead for the project to proceed. Approvals may be needed at several stages of
project development
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
76
Institutional Responsibilities – Typical
Responsibilities (2)
7
• It is useful to identify an existing institution, if available, that is
suitable for each of the main responsibilities.
• Where existing institutional infrastructure and skills are
insufficient, the establishment of a PPP unit may be helpful.
• External advisors may be needed to support the skills available
in-house.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
77
Institutional Responsibilities – Identifying and
Championing Projects
7
• Projects can be identified and championed by the procuring
authority or central authorities.
• The PPP law or policy may specify:
̵ which government entity is allowed to enter into PPP contracts
̵ which authorities are responsible for PPP implementation.
oIt is common for agencies with existing responsibilities for infrastructure, such as
a department of transportation or local authority, to be the procuring authority
and to champion the project.
• In some jurisdictions, a central authority leads the identification
and championing of projects that are suitable to be PPPs.
̵ Such agencies may also run the procurement on behalf of the sector or
local authority.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
78
Institutional Responsibilities – Ensuring
Coordination and Best Practice (1)
Why?
• Sector agencies may lack PPP
skills:
• Little experience in engaging
with the private sector on
privately financed projects.
• Lack expertise in rigorous
project analysis.
• Inadequate focus on achieving
Value for Money for the
government as a whole.
• Coordination across the
government is needed, but
sector agencies cannot provide
this.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
7
How?
• Specialized PPP units.
• External PPP transaction
advisors.
• Inter-departmental committees
to oversee each PPP transaction
• Specialist entities in different
implementing roles (e.g.
regulatory agencies dealing with
contract oversight).
• Central Agencies.
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
79
Institutional Responsibilities – Ensuring
Coordination and Best Practice (2)
Specialized PPP units
• A repository of skill and
experience in
developing PPPs.
• Support contracting
authorities in
implementing PPP
projects.
• Often an extension of a
central agency such as
the ministry of finance.
External PPP transaction
advisors
• Governments do not
have all of the in-house
expertise and skills
needed to develop
PPPs.
• All engage external
specialist advisors for
detailed, technical
tasks, such as
conducting feasibility
studies and drafting PPP
contracts.
• The extent and nature
of external advisory
support needed will
change as the program
evolves.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
7
Inter-departmental
committees
• Can oversee each PPP
transaction.
• Often include
representatives from
the sector ministry as
well as ministries of
finance and planning,
and legal
representatives.
• Processes should be
streamlined and
efficient to avoid
committees becoming
bureaucratic
bottlenecks.
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
80
Institutional Responsibilities – Ensuring
Coordination and Best Practice (3)
Specialist entities in different
implementing roles
• Implementation
responsibilities can be divided
between entities.
• Example: Peru, where the
procurement agency is
responsible for implementing
the PPP transaction, and
sector regulatory agencies are
responsible for monitoring the
private parties’ compliance
with the PPP contract
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
7
Central Agencies
• Agencies with “whole of
government” (rather than
purely sectoral) functions.
• Usually involved in
commenting on major policies
initiatives and projects.
• Involved in the creation of the
PPP framework.
• The framework then generally
requires that advice from the
central agencies be sought at
particular points in the PPP
process.
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
81
Institutional Responsibilities – Ensuring
Coordination and Best Practice (4)
7
• Common central agency roles:
̵ Ministry of finance roles:
oOften central to the controlling function for PPPs.
oHelps ensure that the PPP program is focused on achieving Value for Money and
that fiscal risks are managed.
̵ Planning agency roles:
oWhere national planning agencies perform a strong coordination function in
infrastructure or economic policy generally, they may also regulate the PPP
process.
oThe program generally works best when there is also a mechanism for effective
coordination with the finance ministry.
̵ Attorney general’s role:
oSignoff may be required for major contracts, including PPPs.
oThis is not a universal requirement – some governments recognize that private
law firms in their countries have greater expertise in fields relevant to PPPs such
as construction and project finance.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
82
Institutional Responsibilities – Approvals (1) –
Approval requirements
7
• Most governments define who can give approval for capital
investment projects at various points in the project lifecycle:
̵ PPPs often do not require government capital investment, hence they may
not automatically be subject to these rules.
̵ Many governments therefore define similar requirements for PPPs.
• Creating several decision points allows weak projects to be
stopped before they consume too many resources or develop
a momentum of their own:
̵ Approval is typically needed to enter into a PPP transaction.
̵ Final approval may be needed before the contract is signed.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
83
Institutional Responsibilities – Approvals (2) –
Who gives the approvals?
7
• Jurisdictions vary as to which entity can approve a PPP:
̵ Some require legislative approval of projects.
̵ More often, approval may come from the cabinet or a cabinet level
committee, the finance ministry, or a combination of agencies and
authorities.
̵ Approval responsibilities may depend on the size of the project, as is
typically the case for other capital investments.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
84
Institutional Responsibilities – Approvals
– Example
7
• An example will be discussed in class if time permits or the class will discuss
how are handled approvals in their country.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
85
Institutional Responsibilities – Role and Benefits of
PPP Units (1)
7
• Many governments create a dedicated unit tasked with
implementing, facilitating, or advising on PPPs.
̵ May be a separate entity, or within an existing department.
• PPP Units can have a range of roles – see next slide.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
86
Institutional Responsibilities – Role and Benefits of
PPP Units (2)
Control and oversight of the
PPP process
• Ensuring that the right steps are taken in developing a PPP, so the project meets
the appraisal criteria, and that all required approvals are obtained.
• The PPP unit may also act as an approving body
Development of the PPP
framework
• Management of evolution (but not creation) of the PPP framework, including
developing the process guidelines and keeping them updated
Promoting PPPs within the
government
• For example, reminding implementing agencies that it may be desirable to do
large new projects as PPPs
Advising and supporting
agencies to implement PPPs
Acting as a knowledge centre
Providing communication
channels to investors
Monitoring and support after
financial close
7
• Offering experience and specialist skills acquired because of their focus on PPPs
and involvement in numerous projects
• Collating and disseminating knowledge and information about PPPs
• Ensuring that knowledge is shared across procuring authorities and made
available to the public
• Helping bidders and financiers with information about the program and
upcoming opportunities
• Assisting the procuring authority with contract management
• Ensuring critical information on changes in the PPP’s risk status is communicated to
relevant central agencies to enable them to monitor the project’s contingent liabilities
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
87
Institutional Responsibilities – Designing
PPP Units (1)
7
• A PPP unit’s design should reflect its functions
̵ Units that focus on regulating and controlling the PPP process should
generally be located in finance ministries or planning agencies.
̵ If a PPP unit is undertaking multiple functions, it needs to be designed to
avoid potential conflicts of interest.
̵ If a unit is guiding, advising, and approving PPPs, then it needs to ensure:
othere are internal firewalls; and
othat it involves other entities involved in approvals, or that it brings in additional
scrutiny by audit or other oversight agencies.
• The role of the PPP unit will need to change as the PPP
program matures and government agencies build up expertise
and start developing their own PPP units.
̵ At the outset of a program the PPP unit will likely carry out multiple roles,
but over time it may move towards the regulatory and supervision role.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
88
Institutional Responsibilities – Designing
PPP Units (2) – Key choices to be made
Unit location
• Within an existing
department or
independent?
• May be allocated in a
line ministry or
department, a central
agency such as the
ministry of finance
(or within a national
financial agency or
national
development bank),
the ministry of
planning, or the
prime minister’s
office.
• More than one PPP
unit may coexist, each
with different roles and
scope of
responsibilities
Functions to be
undertaken
• Regulation, control and
oversight?
• Promotion?
• Advice?
• Communications?
• Monitoring and
support?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
7
Resourcing
Funding mechanism
• How will it attract and
retain the right talent
to a public sector
organization?
• Specifically, legal and
financial skills, where
equivalent positions
in the private sector
can be better paid?
• Staffing PPP units may
in turn have an impact
on how they are
structured and
governed.
• How are operating
costs funded?
• A budget allocation?
• A charge to procuring
authorities for its
services?
• Consider the
incentives:
• If procuring
authorities have to
pay, they might be
less willing to involve
the PPP unit
• If the PPP unit relies
on procuring
authorities for its
revenue, it may be
more proactive, but
may have a conflict of
interest in exercising
control and oversight
functions.
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
89
Institutional Responsibilities – Designing
PPP Units (3) – Risks and Pitfalls
7
• A lack of clarity in the PPP unit’s role may worsen, not improve,
coordination.
• If it has insufficient resources (for example, to undertake
appraisals), the unit may become a bottleneck.
• Tension between entities wanting to control the unit may lead
to conflict in its design, and in turn to delays in the creation of
the PPP framework and delivery of the PPP program.
• Also, PPP units cannot perform miracles.
̵ They are unlikely to help much if high-level political commitment to a
quality PPP program is lacking.
̵ They must be integrated into the mainstream project approval and
budgeting process in the government if they are to be successful.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
90
Quiz - Institutional Responsibilities
8-Which of the following is correct?
A. The relevant sector agency should not be responsible for PPP
procurement, as it will have a conflict of interest.
B. A PPP Unit that advises and supports agencies implementing PPPs
should not also have a role in control and oversight of the PPP process.
C. The relevant sector agency should champion PPP projects, as it will
inevitably have the greatest capability to conduct the rigorous project
analysis required.
D. Inter-departmental committees can be effective in overseeing PPP
transactions.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
91
Quiz - PPP Units: roles and benefits
9-Which is incorrect with respect to potential roles and benefits
of a PPP Unit?
A. The role “control and oversight of the PPP process” ensures that the right
steps are taken in developing a PPP, so the project meets the appraisal
criteria, and that all required approvals are obtained.
B. Promoting PPPs within the government implies that a PPP Unit will push
procuring agencies to use PPPs as a preferred route so more PPPs are
developed as soon as possible and this helps market appetite for the
country’s program.
C. The role of “advising and supporting agencies to implement PPPs” is
sensible and beneficial as a PPP Unit will be able to offer a great deal of
experience and specialist skills acquired because of their focus on PPPs
and involvement in numerous projects.
D. The role of “Providing communication channels to investors” is intended
to help bidders and financiers with information about the program and
upcoming opportunities so as to protect or boost the market interest in
the PPP program.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
92
Quiz - Typical Responsibilities
10-Which one is correct:
A. The typical responsibilities include identifying and procuring projects,
ensuring coordination and best practice approaches, managing public
financing and oversighting the contract.
B. The typical responsibilities include identifying and procuring projects,
ensuring coordination and best practice approaches, managing public
financing and approving projects.
C. The typical responsibilities include identifying projects, ensuring
coordination and best practice approaches, managing public financing
and approving projects.
D. The typical responsibilities include identifying projects, financing
projects, ensuring coordination and best practice approaches,
managing public financing and approving projects.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Institutional Responsibilities
93
6
Public Financial
Management of PPPs
Guide Sections
#8
94
Public Financial Management of PPPs Introduction
8
• Public financial management of PPPs:
̵ Concerns controlling reporting and budgeting for fiscal obligations.
̵ Aims to reduce the risk of PPPs costing the government more than
expected or placing undue burden on future generations.
• PPPs commit governments to substantial future obligations
̵ But public financial management is generally geared to annual
appropriations for expenditure.
oTo resolve this situation, PPP-specific public financial management is required
• Poor financial management of PPPs can have wide reaching
economic impacts.
̵ Rating agencies examine the implications of PPP fiscal commitments when
rating government debt.
̵ If PPP commitments are not well managed, the government’s bonds may
be seen as a risky investment, increasing government’s cost of debt.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
95
Public Financial Management of PPPs – Types of
Fiscal Commitments in PPPs (1)
Direct
Liabilities
Payments that must be made
if the PPP proceeds (although
there may be some
uncertainty regarding the
value)
Contingent
Liabilities
Payments where the
occurrence, timing and
magnitude depend on some
uncertain future event,
outside the control of
government
Examples:
Examples:
•Upfront "viability gap” payments
•Availability payments
•Shadow tolls or output-based
payments
•Guarantees on particular risk
variables
•Compensation clauses
•Termination payment commitments
•Debt guarantees or other credit
enhancements
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
8
#6 Public Financial Management
96
Quiz- Public Financial Management
11-Which of the following is true
A. It is not possible to estimate contingent liabilities in advance, therefore
a contingency fund is required.
B. The amount of PPP direct liabilities represents government’s fiscal
exposure to a PPP (or a portfolio of PPPs). Contingent liabilities do not
represent a real fiscal exposure or commitment as the related
payments are uncertain.
C. Risks assumed or retained by the government represent a contingent
liability (for example in the form of compensation clauses in the
contract or specific guarantees such as those related to minimum
traffic), and these should be estimated and considered when assessing
affordability.
D. Termination payments specified in the contract for early termination
scenarios represent a direct liability.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
97
Public Financial Management– Types of Fiscal
Commitments in PPPs (2): the case of government
off –taker
8
• If a government owned entity enters into a PPP, there are two
levels of liability:
The liability of the
governmentowned entity
• Recorded by the entity in question
• May be consolidated into whole-ofgovernment financial reporting
Central
government
liabilities
• Liability to make good if the
government-owned entity defaults
• May be explicit or Implicit
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
98
Public Financial Management of PPPs –
Identifying/Quantifying Direct Liabilities
8
• During appraisal, direct fiscal commitments can be estimated
from the financial model.
̵ The direct fiscal contribution required is usually the difference between
the cost of the project (including a commercial return on capital invested)
and the revenue expected from non-government sources such as user fees.
• The fiscal cost can be measured in different ways.
̵ Estimated payments in each year: Most useful measure when considering
the budget impact of the project; and
̵ Net present value of payments: Captures the government’s total financial
commitment to the project, and it is often used if incorporating the PPP in
financial reporting and analysis (such as debt sustainability analysis).
• How the payments might vary due to changes in key variables
(such as demand, inflation and currency exchange rates) should
be assessed.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
99
Identifying / Quantifying Contingent Liabilities
• More difficult than for direct liabilities, since the need for such
payments, and their timing and value, are uncertain.
• Two possible approaches:
Scenario
analysis
Making assumptions about the outcome of
any events or variables that affect the value
of the contingent liability, and calculating
the cost given those assumptions
8
Probabilistic
analysis
Define how the variables that affect the
value of the contingent liability will behave,
then use mathematics and computer
modelling to calculate the resultant costs
Produces an estimate of the distribution of
possible costs
Requires reliable data from which to
estimate the probability distributions of the
underlying risk variables
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
100
Quiz - Types of Fiscal Liability
12-A national government is considering the following two options for supporting a
PPP project being developed by a sub-national government. The project will be a
government pays project, with the sub-national government making availability
payments to the private partner. That national government is willing to meet these
payments, if necessary, during the first 5 years of availability payments.
1.
2.
Option 1 is for the national government to agree to make payments to the sub-national
government during the 5 year period, with the payments by the national government to
the sub-national government matching the amount and timing of the availability
payments by the sub-national government to the private partner.
Option 2 is for the national government to give a guarantee to the private partner,
guaranteeing payment of the availability payments during the first 5 years.
• What fiscal liabilities would these options create for the national government?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Options 1 and 2 both create direct liabilities for the national government.
Options 1 and 2 both create contingent liabilities for the national government.
Option 1 creates a direct liability and option 2 creates a contingent liability.
Option 1 creates a contingent liability and option 2 creates a direct liability.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
101
Affordability, Budgeting and Accounting/Reporting
8
Affordability
•Identifying whether fiscal
commitments can be
accommodated within
budget constraints.
Budgeting
•Ensuring money is
appropriated and
available to pay for costs.
Accounting/
Reporting
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
•Transparency and
disclosure of
commitments and
payments that have
been made.
#6 Public Financial Management
102
Ensuring Fiscal Commitments are Affordable
8
• Affordability is the “ability to be accommodated within the
inter-temporal budget constraint of the government” (OECD)
• PPP costs are long-term and include contingent liabilities:
̵ not easy to decide whether they are affordable.
• Affordability can assessed by considering:
̵ The medium-term expenditure framework (3 years or longer).
oMake conservative assumptions as to how overall budget limits will evolve
oConsider whether PPP payments can be accommodated within those limits
̵ The annual budget constraint.
oIntroduce budget rules to ensure that PPP commitments are considered in the
annual budget process.
–Example: Colombia: When a PPP project is signed, a cash transfer is made to a contingency
fund. The transfer equals the expected value of payments under any revenue. This means
the decision to accept a contingent liability has an immediate budget impact that must be
considered.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
103
Budgeting for Fiscal Commitments - Introduction
8
• Budgeting ensures money is appropriated and available to pay
for costs the government has agreed to bear.
̵ It is difficult to budget for PPPs in traditional annual budget cycles because
PPP costs may be contingent or occur in the future.
oHowever credible and practical budgeting approaches are needed for good public
financial management, and to assure private partners that they will be paid.
• Budgeting for direct commitments to PPPs.
̵ Upfront or grant payments to PPPs, typically made within the first few
years of a project, can be relatively easily built into annual budgets and
medium-term expenditure frameworks.
oSome governments (for example, India) have introduced funds (known as Viability
Gap Funds) from which such payments will be made.
̵ Longer-term direct commitments, such as availability payments, are more
challenging.
oThe private party faces a risk that payments may not be appropriated when due.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
104
Budgeting for Fiscal Commitments – Long-term
Direct Commitments
Where risk of government not
appropriating is low
Where risk of government not
appropriating is high
• No special budgeting
approach for direct, longterm PPP commitments.
• It is assumed that a
responsible legislature will
always approve
appropriations to meet the
government’s legally binding
payment commitments.
• Mechanisms may be
introduced to reduce the risk.
• Example (Brazil):
• Legislate to treat PPP
subsidy payments in the
same way as government
debt service payments –
once subsidy is approved,
annual appropriation
requires no further
legislative approval.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
8
105
Budgeting for Fiscal Commitments – Contingent
Liabilities
8
• Challenging because payments may become due unexpectedly
̵ The government may need to request a supplementary appropriation
• Two ways to avoid this:
Create additional budget flexibility
•For example:
•Include a contingency line in the
budget from which unexpected
payments can be made; or
•Allow spending in excess of the
budget without need for additional
approval in certain defined
circumstances.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
Create a contingent liability fund
•An account to which transfers are
made in advance, and from which
payments for realized contingent
liabilities will be made when due.
•Can help control the government’s
fiscal commitments to PPPs as well as
provide a clear budgeting mechanism.
•Can avoid the timing issues that arise if
funds must be appropriated through
the budget process in order to meet a
contingent liability.
#6 Public Financial Management
106
Quiz - Budgeting for Fiscal Commitments
13-It is difficult to budget for contingent liabilities, as payments
may become due unexpectedly. Which of the following is true
when responding to this challenge?
1.
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
This may be dealt with by creating budget flexibility, for example by
including a contingency line in the budget from which unexpected
payments can be made, or allowing spending in excess of the budget in
certain defined circumstances.
This may be dealt with by creating a contingency fund, i.e. an account to
which transfers are made in advance, and from which payments for
realized contingent liabilities will be made when due.
Only #1 is true
Only #2 is true
Neither is true
Both are true
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
107
Budgeting for Fiscal Commitments – Contingent
Liability Funds - Example
8
• Indonesia Infrastructure Guarantee Fund
̵ Mandated to provide guarantees for government contracting agencies’
financial obligations under PPP agreements
̵ Paid up capital of $500m
̵ Has a stringent selection process for determining which projects to
guarantee
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#5 Public Financial Management
108
Accounting for, and Reporting on, Fiscal
Commitments (1) – Types of reporting
8
Government finance
statistics
Government financial
statements
Budget documentation
and reporting
• Summary statistics on
the state of a
government’s finances.
• Intended to be
internationally
comparable.
• May follow regional or
international
standards, such as
those set by Eurostat
or the IMF
• Most governments
publish audited financial
statements
• Some governments
follow internationally
recognized standards
on what should be in
financial statements,
such as the
International Public
Sector Accounting
Standards (IPSAS)
• Most governments
prepare reports on
financial performance as
part of budget
preparation and
reporting.
• Not subject to
international standards
• There are international
guidance materials (for
example, by the IMF and
OECD) that promote
transparency.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
109
Recognizing PPP liabilities (1) - accounting for PPP
assets and direct liabilities
8
• Need to decide whether PPP commitments should be recognized (formally
recorded in financial statements as a liability) or not – the later may create a bias in
favour of PPP or influence the PPP structure.
• Two standards specifically address accounting for PPP projects:
̵ IPSAS Standard 32: PPP assets and liabilities should be included in the government’s
balance sheet if (i) the government controls or regulates what services the operator
must provide with the PPP asset, to whom, and at what price; and (ii) the government
controls any significant residual interest in the asset at the end of the contract.
o Under this definition, government-pays PPPs would appear on the government’s balance sheet;
the treatment of user-pays PPPs is less clear, and may depend on the details of the contract
̵ Eurostat guideline: Requires European governments to recognize PPP liabilities in
debt statistics where the government does not transfer to the private sector “the
majority of risks”, including construction risks and either demand or availability risk.
• Donors may require compliance with their own accounting and reporting
standards
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
110
Accounting for PPP contingent liabilities
8
• Most accounting and reporting standards do not require
governments to recognize contingent liabilities, including
those arising from PPP contracts.
̵ Exception: IPSAS standards for governments implementing accrual
accounting require contingent liabilities to be recognized if it is likely that
the underlying event will occur and the amount of the obligation can be
measured with sufficient reliability.
oThe net present value of the expected cost of the contingent liability should be
recognized as a liability (a provision) and as an expense when the contract is
signed.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
111
Disclosing PPP liabilities
8
• Even when PPP commitments are not recognized as liabilities,
they should be disclosed in notes to the accounts and reports.
• Disclosing useful information on contingent liabilities is
complicated.
̵ The expected value of payments is useful but difficult to predict.
̵ It is also useful if the magnitude and the likelihood of a liability being
incurred are disclosed.
–Examples:
–Australia and New Zealand disclose contingent liabilities including for PPPs in notes to
financial statements available online.
–Chile’s Budget Directorate of the Ministry of Finance publishes an annual contingent
liabilities report which includes information on contingent liabilities from revenue and
exchange rate guarantees to PPPs.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
112
Controlling Aggregate Fiscal Exposure to PPPs
8
• In addition to considering fiscal exposure on a project-byproject basis, some governments introduce targets or rules
limiting aggregate exposure.
̵ These limits help to ensure the government’s total exposure to PPP costs
and risks remain within manageable limits.
–Examples: Peru’s restricts PPP commitments and measurable contingent liabilities to a
percentage of GDP; Hungary and Brazil (at Federal level) limit total financial commitments
undertaken in PPP contracts to a percentage of government’s annual net revenue.
oHowever, PPP specific limits can create incentives for agencies to choose public
procurement over PPP even when PPP would provide better Value for Money.
oAn alternative is to incorporate limits on PPP commitments within other fiscal
targets, for example within targets or limits on public debt by placing a limit on
“debt plus PPP commitments”.
• When aggregate exposure is limited, each PPP will have to be
tested against such overall limits during the appraisal.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
113
Quiz - Accounting for PPP assets and liabilities
14-There is a government-pays PPP contract for a hospital, in which government clearly defines
the services to be provided by the private partner and the calculation of the price to be paid to the
private partner. Payments are related to level of performance in the form of availability of the
facility. During an unavailability event, as defined in contract, the payment will be zero unless the
event is resolved within a rectification period. Payments will not be adjusted for construction cost
changes (except where the change is a result of a very short list of unlikely and unavoidable
events). There is no risk for the private partner related to volume / level of use of the hospital (but
if occupancy is much higher than expected there will be compensation for increased variable costs
incurred). At the end of the contract period, the asset will revert to the government for no
payment.
Based in the information provided about this PPP project, which is true?
A. According to IPSAS 32 and Eurostat guidelines, the asset should be regarded as a public asset
and incorporated in the government´s balance sheet.
B. According to either guideline the asset may be treated as off the balance sheet of the
government.
C. The asset should only be regarded as a public asset under IPSAS 32, as government has clear
control and an interest in the residual value, but risk appears to be sufficiently transferred for
the asset to be off balance sheet according to the Eurostat guidelines.
D. The asset should only be regarded as a public asset according under Eurostat, because risk is
not sufficiently transferred but government does not have sufficient control of the asset
according to IPSAS.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#6 Public Financial Management
114
7
Oversight of PPP Programs
Guide Sections
#9
115
Oversight of PPP Programs - Introduction
9
• PPP projects are usually implemented by the Executive branch
of government.
• The following entities and groups can also play a role in
ensuring good governance of the PPP program:
̵ The legislature: Often defines the PPP framework; May approve PPP
projects; may exercise ex-post oversight, scrutinizing PPP commitments.
̵ Auditing entities: May consider PPP commitments as part of their regular
audit responsibilities; May also investigate particular points of concern or
review PPP project performance or the VfM of the program as a whole.
̵ The public: Can be involved through consultation; Serious issues may also
influence elections.
̵ Other mechanisms: Can include probity advisors to identify and minimize
any real or perceived conflicts of interest and public procurement
watchdogs to monitor the procurement process.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
116
Oversight of PPP Programs – The role of the
Legislature
Defining the PPP
legal framework
and policy:
9
•The PPP framework is often established in specific PPP
legislation.
•A PPP law enables the legislature to set rules for how PPPs will be
developed and implemented, against which those responsible
can be held accountable.
Defining limits
on PPP
commitments:
•The legislature may limit total PPP fiscal commitments the
amount taken on in a year, or otherwise govern the risk and
inter-generational equity issues that PPPs can create
Approving PPP
projects:
•PPP projects may require parliamentary approval
•This requirement can be limited to PPP projects above a certain
size. The risk that parliament will not approve entry into a PPP
contract may decrease investor appetite to bid for PPPs in the
country.
Program
oversight:
• Information on the program may be included in budget documents
and financial reports.
• Project or contract summaries may be tabled in parliament after
financial close, enabling it to scrutinize PPP commitments.
• Parliament may also receive auditors’ reports on the PPP program.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
117
Oversight of PPP Programs – Audit Entities and Ex
Post Evaluation
9
• The mandate of supreme audit entities varies by jurisdiction,
but should generally :
̵ Regularity audits which can include auditing the financial statements of
government entities and of the government as a whole, and auditing
decision-making processes for compliance and probity
̵ Performance or Value for Money audits, reviewing the government’s
effectiveness and efficiency. These audits can be conducted at the PPP
program or project level.
• Audit entities’ remits typically extend only to government
agencies and entities wholly or majority owned by the
government, not PPP companies.
̵ To enable auditors to access relevant information, the PPP contract can
include requirements that the PPP Company provide audited accounts and
any other relevant data the government may require.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
118
Oversight of PPP Programs – Types of Audits
9
Regularity auditing for PPPs
• When carrying out regularity audits of contracting authorities, audit entities will
typically check that PPP commitments are appropriately reflected in the accounts, and
that PPP processes have been followed. Audits can occur at any stage of the PPP
process, including during project preparation or after procurement.
Performance auditing of PPP projects and PPP programs
• May be audits of particular PPP projects or broader PPP programs, checking whether
processes have been appropriately followed, or whether the project is providing VfM.
• The International Organization of Supreme Audit Institutions (INTOSAI) recommends
that performance audits be conducted soon after procurement, and further reviews
should be carried out over the project lifetime, covering the following information:
 All major aspects of the deal that have a bearing on Value for Money, such as
required actions, outputs, and timing of delivery;
 How the PPP was identified;
 How the transaction process was managed;
 The tender process that was adopted;
 How the contract was finalized; and
 Ongoing management of the PPP contract
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
119
Oversight of PPP Programs – The role of the Public
9
PPP program development
• The government can engage the public from the onset by involving
them in the development of the PPP policy framework and
continuing to seek feedback as the program is developed
PPP project development
• The government can introduce stakeholder consultation in the PPP
development process, so that public concerns can be taken into
consideration when structuring and implementing PPPs
PPP contract monitoring
• The government can build mechanisms for user feedback and
grievance resolution into contract agreements and management
frameworks.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
120
Oversight of PPP Programs – Promoting
transparency of the program
9
• Many governments make information about the PPP program
publicly available.
̵ This enables the media to report on the program, and allows the public to
develop informed opinions on the government’s performance in
implementing PPPs.
• International standards require disclosure of financial
commitments to PPPs in national accounts.
• Performance audits and reports are also commonly publicly
available.
• It is possible to also require disclosure of key contract clauses,
or entire PPP contracts.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
121
Oversight of PPP Programs – Disclosure
Frameworks: World Bank Guidance (1)
9
• Key aspects of a framework related to information disclosure:
̵ Accounting and reporting for PPP liabilities.
̵ Transparency of the procurement process.
• The private sector will only be interested in PPP programs on a
significant scale if the procurement rules provide and protect
transparency and fairness in selection, as well as access to
meaningful information and studies on the projects to enable
potential bidders to assess the opportunity in an efficient
manner.
• For government to be accountable for procurement decisions,
information must be available to be audited, including
information related to the fairness of the process itself and the
performance of the PPP project.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
122
Disclosure Frameworks: World Bank Guidance (2)
– Types of Disclosure
Proactive disclosure
and reactive disclosure
Pre-procurement
disclosure and Postprocurement
disclosure
Proactive: Disclosed by
governments either
voluntarily or under a
mandate provided by
legislation or policy.
Pre-procurement:
Disclosure prior to the
signing of the contract.
Reactive: In response to a
request for information,
usually under a Freedom
of Information or Right to
Information Act.
Post-procurement: After
the signing of the
contract.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
9
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
123
Oversight of PPP Programs – Disclosure
Frameworks: World Bank Guidance (3)
9
• Benefits of Disclosure:
̵ Increased appetite from the private investor community.
̵ Increased public confidence in how tax payers’ money is being spent and
whether the government is achieving Value for Money.
̵ A proper disclosure approach is extraordinarily helpful to tackle
corruption.
• Elements to induce Better Disclosure Practices:
̵ Freedom of Information Acts, preferably with requirements for proactive
disclosure.
̵ PPP specific legislation/guidance.
̵ Guidance on confidential information.
̵ Provision of standard contract clauses.
̵ Templates for disclosing information.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
124
Promoting Procurement and Good Governance,
and Reducing Corruption
9
• High value transactions attract the risk of corruption.
̵ Private players may attempt to improperly influence transactions
̵ Public officials may attempt to extract private profit from public office.
• Corruption in PPPs can be minimized oversight mechanisms,
plus:
̵ Probity advisors and auditors / Fairness / Conflict of Interest Advisors
o Can ensure organizations act with integrity and impartiality, that suppliers are
treated equally, that there are consistent and transparent processes, that
intellectual property remains confidential, that conflicts of interest are resolved,
and that procurement processes are aligned with capability.
– Examples: Probity advisors used in Victoria, Australia; Fairness and Conflict of Interest
Advisors in British Colombia, Canada
̵ Government procurement agencies
oCan check that procurement processes have been followed.
– Examples: Jamaica; Romania.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
125
Quiz - PPP Oversight
15-Which of the following is incorrect regarding the potential
role of audit entities, the public, the legislature or other agents
such as probity advisors?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Audit entities may conduct “regularity audits” (for example auditing
decision-making processes for compliance and probity) and “Performance
or Value for Money audits”, reviewing the government’s effectiveness and
efficiency when developing a PPP program or specific projects
Corruption in PPPs can be minimized by oversight mechanisms, but also by
using probity advisors as well as fairness and conflict of interest advisors
There is a role for the public in PPP programs and projects, including
participating in consultation during the PPP project development process,
with the intention that the public vote and decide whether the project
deserves to proceed
The legislature usually has a role in approving PPP legislation (including
potentially establishing limits on fiscal commitments in a law) and in some
countries the legislature’s role may also include the approval of PPP
contracts
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
126
Quiz - PPP Oversight
16-Which of the following is correct?
A. PPP contracts should require the private partner to give the
government party access to financial information and other data about
the private partner.
B. Auditors-General usually have no role in relation to PPPs, as PPPs are
delivered by the private sector.
C. As the actual cost of a PPP may not be known until the tender process
has been completed, the government should not make information
about the project available to the public prior to awarding the contract.
D. Parliamentary scrutiny of PPPs is best implemented by requiring
parliamentary approval for each PPP contract.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Frameworks
#7 Oversight of PPP Programs
127
In collaboration with
Contact
Andres Rebollo
arebollo@k-infrastructure.com
Richard Foster
richard@fosterinfrastructure.com
This material is intellectual property of Knowledge Infrastructure
and Foster Infrastructure.
It may be only used by the client referred to on the front page of
the document.
Dissemination of this material to any third party other than the
client is not allowed.
128
Knowledge Infrastructure, S.L. ©
Foster Infrastructure Pty Ltd ©
October 2020
This material is intellectual property of Knowledge
Infrastructure and Foster Infrastructure.
Dissemination of this material to any third party by
candidates or by the institution is not allowed without prior
consent by K-Infra in writing.
The APMG PPP Certification Program is a registered
Trade Mark of The APM Group Limited. All rights
reserved.
This document is subject to
intellectual property rights and it
its contents cannot be copied,
distributed or transferred without
prior explicit consent by K-infra.
CP3P – Practitioner
Course
Chapter 3
Project Identification and PPP
Screening
Prepared by
1
Learning objectives
• After studying this chapter, students should understand how to:
̵ Ensure a project has sufficient economic merit to proceed;
̵ Avoid the risk of sinking resources into the analysis and structuring of a
non-feasible PPP project; and
̵ Prepare and get ready for the next phase: Appraisal.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
2
Content
• Objectives and Overview of the Project Identification and Screening Phase.
• Identifying Needs: Entry Routes to the Pipeline and Project Prioritization.
• Option Analysis and Selection Techniques.
• Technical Outline of the Selected Solution and information requirements.
• Economic Soundness. Introduction to Cost-Benefit Analysis.
• Scoping the PPP Project and Testing PPP Suitability. The screening report.
• Project Management Plan and Project Governance. Identifying Stakeholders
and Developing the Communication Strategy.
• Assessing Capabilities and Needs, Building the Project Team and Hiring
Advisors.
• Outcomes of Project Identification and Screening Phase.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
3
1
Objectives and Overview of
Project Identification and
Screening
Guide Sections
#1, #2
4
Objectives of the Project Identification
and Screening Phase
• The PPP process is composed of a number of phases, requiring
a significant amount of time and resources.
• By carefully choosing which projects are included in the PPP
pipeline and developed to feasibility level, governments can:
̵ ensure that resources are well-spent.
̵ reduce the likelihood of failure.
̵ guarantee the procurement process will run more efficiently.
• A two-step approach can ensure that resources are well spent:
1.
2.
Preliminary analysis is developed within the Screening Phase.
Full appraisal is then conducted on those projects that pass the
screening process.
• This avoids the risk of unnecessarily consuming resources in the
Appraisal Phase.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#1 Objectives and Overview
5
Screening and Appraisal – The two step
approach
Project 1
Project 1
Project 2
Project 1
Project 3
Project 4
Project Identification and Screening:
Many different projects are identified
and screened
Project 4
Project 3
Project Appraisal: Based on the
identification and screening process,
some projects appear sufficiently
worthwhile to move to full appraisal
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
Project 4
Procurement: Appraisal determines
that some projects are suitable for
procurement.
#1 Objectives and Overview
6
Overview of the Project Identification
and Screening Phase - main tasks
Test the economic
sense and
soundness of the
project using CostBenefit Analysis.
Test whether the
project makes sense
as a PPP.
Conduct financial
analysis to pre-test
affordability.
The project has
been identified and
pre-defined, is
suitable to be a PPP,
and information
gaps, uncertainties
and key
stakeholders have
been identified.
Information should
be recorded in a
screening report, on
the basis of which a
decision is taken
whether to move
forward to the
Appraisal Phase
Scoping the
project and
collecting
information
Preliminary
economic
feasibility
Testing PPP
suitability and
affordability
Readiness of the
project: Project
management
plan
Screening
report and
decision to
move forward
Focus on the
performance and
capacity of the
completed asset
(output
specifications),
not how the project
will be constructed
(input
specifications).
The Guide states
that Cost-Benefit
Analysis should be
used to test
economic feasibility,
even if another
technique was used
to select the
technical solution.
Project
management plan
should include an
appraisal staffing
plan, proposed
advisor support,
budget estimates
and a funding plan
for hiring external
expertise.
A full appraisal (of
technical,
environmental,
socio-economic, and
financial aspects)
will take place in the
next phase of the
PPP cycle.
Any process to
procure public goods
or services should
start with
identification of the
need.
Identify the
technical solution
that best suits the
identified need.
Identify the benefits
created by satisfying
the needs.
Needs and
option analysis:
Select the
project
The Guide assumes
that a need has
already been
identified.
Note that the PPP
scope may be a subset of the technical
scope – some
elements of the
project might be
delivered separately
from the PPP.
Central figure (in blue) © The World Bank Group, 2015 All rights reserved. Source: https://ppp-certification.com/certification
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#1 Objectives and Overview
7
Quiz – (an easy warm-up question!)
1-Which of the following is not a task carried out in the Project
Identification and Screening Phase?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Testing of economic feasibility.
Assessing affordability.
Allocating risks between the public and private sectors.
Developing a project management plan.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#1 Objectives and Overview
8
2
Identifying Needs: Entry
Routes to the Pipeline and
Prioritization
Guide Sections
#3, #4
9
Identifying Needs: Entry Routes to the
Pipeline (1)
• The first step is to identify the need (the PPP Guide assumes
this is already done)
• A government can respond to identified needs in two ways:
1.
o
2.
By identifying an individual project.
The project may have one or more infrastructure components that should be
tested for PPP suitability.
By developing a comprehensive plan that identifies a range of proposed
projects.
o
The plan may be for a single sector or across a range of sectors, and it may be
for a single geographical area or for the entire country.
–
Example: The Indonesian government has developed a pipeline of infrastructure
projects based on its Master Plan for Acceleration and Expansion of Indonesia
Economic Development 2011–2025. This calls for developing six “economic corridors”
— regions that focus on specific industries. Investment projects are then developed
based on the type of infrastructure, such as roads or ports that would be needed to
support those industries.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#2 Identifying Needs
10
Identifying Needs: Entry Routes to the
Pipeline (2)
ENTRY ROUTE 1:
Ad Hoc
Projects
ENTRY ROUTE 2:
Plan
Department
investigates /
identifies a
need
Government
defines
strategic
needs /
objectives
THE PROJECT
CYCLE:
Specific
project needs
are identified
A common
process for all
projects that
enter the PPP
Pipeline
Figure © The World Bank Group, 2015 All rights reserved. Source: https://ppp-certification.com/certification
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#2 Identifying Needs
11
Rationale of Plans and project Pipelines
• The list of identified projects, responding to individual needs or
forming part of a plan, is called a pipeline.
• Connectedness of projects should not be overlooked:
̵ The effectiveness of one project might be increased significantly if another
project is also undertaken.
• A pipeline is important to attract investors:
̵ Investors prefer to invest in a market that has a recognizable pipeline.
̵ A pipeline suggests a structured approach is being followed.
̵ A pipeline offers the potential to invest in a spread of projects in the same
market, and to benefit from lessons learned and a similar context.
̵ Gives comfort that sufficient PPPs are likely to be forthcoming.
• A government's project pipeline should contain all of its major
projects, regardless of procurement method.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#2 Identifying Needs
12
Unsolicited proposals
• Unsolicited proposals are an
alternative source of projects for the
pipeline.
• An unsolicited proposal should fit
with strategic objectives or respond
to a clear need already identified by
the public sector and should be
included in the project list or the
plan.
̵ Unsolicited proposals should not bypass
the system.
̵ If the government wishes to consider
unsolicited proposals, it should make them
part of the system.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#2 Identifying Needs
13
Quiz - Entry routes to the pipeline
2-Which of the following are correct?
1.
2.
Investors prefer to invest in a market that has a recognizable pipeline.
Projects should only be identified as part of a coherent plan that
identifies a range of proposed projects for a specific sector.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Neither 1 nor 2 are correct.
Only 1 is correct.
Only 2 is correct.
Both 1 and 2 are correct.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#2 Identifying Needs
14
Factors affecting Prioritization and Selection of
projects
• Governments need to undertake a prioritization exercise to
choose between different projects. Why?
oCurrent or future budgets may be restricted (this is usually the case).
oThere are limits to society's ability and appetite to make user payments. If there
are a large number of new projects with significant user charges, this may have an
unacceptable impact on people's cost of living or the cost of doing business in the
region.
• Project prioritization enables the government to choose the
right alternatives when there are numerous economically and
technically feasible projects that address public needs.
oThe main objective is to ensure that public funds are well spent and produce the
highest benefit for society, even if budgets or users’ capacity to pay are restricted.
oPrioritization may require the government to abandon a project for the time
being, or postpone/move it to later.
oEconomic analysis typically used to prioritize: higher economic Net Present Value
(eNPV) or economic Internal Rate of Return (eIRR).
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#2 Identifying Needs
15
What is needed for rigorous project
prioritisation? Areas of focus for rigor
People and systems
• Governments should train the right people and develop the appropriate systems for
conducting these evaluations.
• One approach is to create new units within a government that have the experience and tools
to conduct the analyses.
• Initially, it may make sense to tap outside experts to lead the effort while training in-house
staff.
Cost benchmarks
• Governments should develop benchmark databases that collect cost information on
both public and PPP infrastructure projects.
• This should include not only the capital expenditures for developing a project but also
the cost of operating the project.
Standardized methodologies
• Governments should develop standardized methodologies for making these
assessments and identify a source of common key assumptions (e.g. , what the financing
costs would look like under a public-sector approach versus a private-sector approach).
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#2 Identifying Needs
16
Quiz - Project Prioritisation
3-Which of the following are correct?
1. Project prioritisation enables the government to deliver all
proposed projects in the correct sequence.
2. Governments do not need to prioritise projects with user
charges, as these projects do not consume any of the
government’s budget capacity.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Neither 1 nor 2 are correct.
Only 1 is correct.
Only 2 is correct.
Both 1 and 2 are correct.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#2 Identifying Needs
17
3
Option Analysis and
Selection Techniques
Guide Sections
#5
18
Option Analysis and Selection
Techniques (1)
• There are multiple techniques for identifying the best technical
solution for a project i.e. which projects best meet public needs
• Common techniques:
̵ Cost Benefit Analysis.
̵ Cost Effectiveness Analysis.
̵ Multi-Criteria Analysis.
• The government should have a policy of using a particular
technique so that all projects are compared consistently.
• Screening on a case-by-case basis using different techniques
would lead to invalid comparisons between different projects.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#3 Option Analysis
19
Option Analysis and Selection Techniques (2)
Cost Benefit Analysis
Cost Effectiveness Analysis
Multi-Criteria
Analysis
Basis of
comparison
Compares options by testing
which shows highest Net
Present Value (NPV) in
economic terms or highest
economic Internal Rate of
Return (eIRR)
Compares options by examining cost
relative to a measure of project objectives
(its key outcomes or benefits)
Example: Dollars per time saved on various
public transportation systems
Compares options by
reference to an explicit
set of objectives with
measurable criteria (often
quantitative analysis of
qualitative impacts – e.g.
numerical scores are
given against qualitative
criteria)
Advantages
•
•
Disadvantages
•
•
•
Quantifies the socioeconomic impact of the
project
The most appropriate
technique for the
economic feasibility
assessment
•
Can be intensive and
complex
Some cost information
may not be available
Benefits may be difficult
to quantify
•
•
•
Less intensive and complex than cost
benefit analysis
Provides an alternative technique if
valuing benefits in monetary terms is
too difficult
•
Useful when defining
monetary values for
all the major costs
and benefits is
impractical
Assessment of effectiveness relies on
subjective judgment
Some cost information may not be
available
•
May require
consideration of
multiple conflicting
criteria
Can be sensitive to
the weighting of the
criteria
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#3 Option Analysis
•
20
Options Analysis – Putting the theory into
Note to candidates: this will be discussed in class
practice (1)
• The following slide contains scenarios for training participants
to discuss in groups.
• Review your scenario and answer the following questions:
1.
2.
3.
If you were analysing the options using cost benefit analysis, what
benefits would you quantify, and how?
If you were analysing the options using cost effectiveness analysis, what
units of effectiveness would you measure?
If you were analysing the options using multi criteria analysis, what
criteria would you use?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#3 Option Analysis
21
Options Analysis – Putting the theory into
practice (2) – Scenarios Note to candidates: this will be discussed in class
Scenario 1 – Transport
Project
Scenario 2 – Water
Project
Scenario 3 – Aged Care
Project
Scenario 4 – Justice
Sector Project
• The need:
• Reduce transport
congestion in a key
transport corridor
between a residential
area and an industrial
are.
• The need:
• Supply potable
drinking water to a
coastal community
that currently only
has access to
polluted river water.
• The need:
• Provide adequate
care for a growing
elderly population
with insufficient
income to meet the
costs on their own.
• The need:
• Relieve pressure on
an over-crowded
prison system.
• Options being
analysed:
• Add new lanes to an
existing road
between the
residential area and
the industrial area.
• Build a metro rail line
between the
residential area and
an industrial area.
• Options being
analysed:
• A sea water
desalination plant
and an associated
water distribution
network.
• A water treatment
plant processing river
water and an
associated water
distribution network.
• Options being
analysed:
• Payment of direct
subsidies to the aged
to enable them to
pay for care in their
existing homes.
• Construction of
government
subsidised aged care
homes operated by
the private sector.
• Options being
analysed:
• Construction of a
new prison
• Justice reinvestment
– provide services to
prisoners during and
immediately after
their time in prison to
help them become
law abiding citizens
and prevent them reoffending and
returning to prison.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#3 Option Analysis
22
Quiz - Option Analysis
4-Which is a true statement about the Cost-Effectiveness
Analysis technique used for option analysis and selection?
A. It uses monetary terms as the denominator.
B. It is the most appropriate technique for the economic
feasibility assessment.
C. It divides the total cost of a project by the total expenditure
to produce a cost effectiveness ratio.
D. The output is a non-valued ratio which leaves a subjective
judgement.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#3 Option Analysis
23
Quiz - Option Analysis
5-Identify the missing words in the following sentence:
Multi-Criteria Analysis uses [ ? ] criteria in the evaluation of an
alternative.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Only quantitative.
Only qualitative.
Both quantitative and qualitative.
Monetary values for all.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#3 Option Analysis
24
4
Technical Outline or
Technical Scope of the
Selected Solution, and
Information Requirements
Guide Sections
#6, #7
25
Technical Outline of the Selected Solution (1) –
Considerations and Benefits
• The next step after defining the technical solution is to describe and clarify the
technical scope, including a detailed description of the project and set of
requirements for the most important aspects of the project (that is, a
technical outline of the project → see next slide)
̵ The project should be described with sufficient certainty to enable government to
respond to the PPP screening questions.
̵ Good scoping clarifies the information needed - note that good quality of information
is crucial.
• Additional time and effort may be required to adequately define the PPP
project scope if, at the outset, one or more of the following factors are
prevalent:
̵ Lack of a clear specification of what is required.
̵ Novelty or lack of experience of this particular activity.
̵ Complexity in terms of the number of influencing factors and associated interdependencies.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#4 Technical Outline
26
Technical Outline of the Selected
Solution (2) – Content of the Outline
Sector
Physical
conditions
• Distance etc. for transport projects
• Area etc. for buildings
Site
Geographical
location
Affected /
benefited
population
Photo © Foster Infrastructure. All rights reserved.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#4 Technical Outline
27
Information Requirements / Data Checklist
(1) – Introduction
• Most projects have constraints and dependencies that must be
clarified before beginning the full appraisal (e.g. , land availability,
environmental studies)
̵ Key consideration: Identify potential difficulties or obstacles that will have
to be considered during the full appraisal.
̵ Uncertainties regarding constraints and dependencies should be listed in
the screening report.
̵ A list of legal and regulatory issues that need to be further tested in the full
appraisal should be included in the screening report to inform the next
phase.
• The list should also provide a description of any information or
data weaknesses, recommending, if necessary, further analysis
or research to correct these weaknesses.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#4 Technical Outline
28
Information Requirements / Data
Checklist (2a) – Possible uncertainties
Land
availability
Construction
risks
•For example, dependence on geotechnical conditions
Technology
requirements
Significant site
risks
•For example, a need to use new or
untested technology
•Such as a lack of information in
relation to utilities or hazardous
materials
Environmental
concerns
Permits
Unavailable
information
Photo © Foster Infrastructure. All rights reserved.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
•Access to other permits such as
those to be issued by other
governments
•General concerns about the
availability of information for the
appraisal
#4 Technical Outline
29
Information Requirements / Data
Checklist (2a) – Possible uncertainties
Note to candidates: this will be discussed in class
– Discussion
• The photo on the previous slide is of a toll road. When the
project was first identified, what uncertainties might there have
been in respect of:
̵ Land availability?
̵ Construction risks?
̵ Technology requirements?
̵ Significant site risks?
̵ Environmental concerns?
̵ Permits?
̵ Unavailable information?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#4 Technical Outline
30
Information Requirements (3a) – Typical
Information required
The following is the typical information needed to conduct the economic
assessment and to screen PPP suitability.
• Name and position of the proponent:
̵ Person in charge/department within the Public Sector.
• Project description:
̵ Technical outline.
• Cost estimate (Capital expenditures – CAPEX):
̵ At this stage, the Capex estimation is preliminary and subject to change.
̵ Some governments resist public release of this estimate to avoid creating
unrealistic expectations about project costs.
• Construction term.
• Affected area/population.
• Operation and maintenance (O&M) cost estimates:
̵ Including life-cycle/refurbishment costs that will be incurred during the possible
term of a PPP contract.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#4 Technical Outline
31
Information Requirements (3b) – Typical
Information (cont.)
• Consideration of whether, and to what extent, user fees can be charged:
̵ Revenue estimates (may require demand studies, such as traffic forecasts)
• Timetable objectives:
̵ Desired procurement dates
• Estimated public support / contributions required, if any
• Explanation/justification of the project’s suitability in relation to the public
sector’s general policies / strategic plan
• Description of the need being fulfilled by the project:
̵ Main economic impact factors and socio-economic benefits of the project
• Options and suitability of the proposed solution:
̵ Are there other technical options?
̵ Have these options been considered? If not, explain why.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#4 Technical Outline
32
Information Requirements (3c) – Typical
Information (cont.)
• Description of potential interest from the private sector and availability of
private skills for such a project:
̵ Potential sources of finance.
̵ Likely sources of bidders, including whether local firms will be interested in or capable of
bidding alone (or as part of a consortium), and whether regional or global firms will be
interested.
• Similar precedents:
̵ Both successful precedents and unsuccessful precedents.
• Site/land availability, if relevant
• Environmental considerations:
̵ Describe environmental requirements / difficulties if significant.
• Status and readiness:
̵ Describe studies that have already been carried out or that are in process, if applicable
• Other relevant information in relation to suitability, economic soundness,
project readiness, risk of failure in project delivery/implementation, and so
on.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#4 Technical Outline
33
Information Requirements (4) –
Information sources
• Some basic information can be collected directly from the
project management team.
• Data related to estimates of costs can be collected in a variety
of different ways.
̵ It may be possible to directly estimate the costs of delivering the project
scope.
̵ It is important to compare these costs to market parameters for similar
projects.
̵ A database of comparator projects can greatly assist the project team to
assess the reasonableness of these estimates.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#4 Technical Outline
34
Quiz - Technical Outline and Information Requirements
6-Why are constraints and dependencies part of the information
requirements in the Project Identification and PPP Screening
Phase?
A. Legal and regulatory issues must be resolved before a project
moves forward to appraisal.
B. A project containing constraints should not move forward to
appraisal.
C. A project containing dependencies is not suitable as a PPP.
D. Potential difficulties or obstacles may influence a project
moving forward to appraisal.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#4 Technical Outline
35
5
Economic Soundness.
Introduction to Cost-Benefit
Analysis
Guide Sections
#8
36
Economic Soundness: Introduction to
Cost-benefit Analysis
• Cost-Benefit Analysis (CBA) is the most refined form of
economic analysis
̵ It assesses the social cost-benefit equation:
oIf the benefits for society are higher than the costs to the public, the project is
worthy of proceeding.
̵ It aims to include all relevant costs and benefits.
oThis is done with a long-term perspective.
oThe period considered should reflect the useful economic life of the asset.
• Uses of CBA:
̵ CBA may be used to identify an option (from several technical solutions for
the same need) when there are several options under discussion.
̵ If the best technical option has already been identified, CBA may be used
to confirm the investment decision [according to the Guide it is the most
appropriate tool for economic feasibility analysis]
oIn this scenario, CBA is comparing the “project” and the “do nothing option”.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
37
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
The Analysis Process
Projecting
Financial Data
with
Conversion /
Adjustment
Adding
Externalities
Adding (other)
socioeconomic
benefits &
costs
Relative price
adjustments
and bias / risk
adjustments
Defining Base
Case,
Discounting
and
Calculating
eIRR
Incorporating
Uncertainty:
Sensitivities
Closing the
Analysis and
reporting
•Tax
Adjustments
•Shadow
prices and
opportunity
costs
adjustment
•Construction
of the model
•Defining
term and
residual
value
•Defining list
of
externalities
(positive and
negative)
•Monetizing /
inferring
value for
relevant
benefits and
costs
•Considering /
qualifying
other
unvalued
benefits and
costs
•Relative
price
•Bias & risk
adjustments
•Discount rate
definition
•Calculation
of eNPV and
eIRR.
•Test the
strength of
the proposed
Business Plan
and present
the effect of
variations
•Include the
assumptions
and results in
the Screening
Report
This graph has been edited for improvement.
We start with the financial data, adjust for taxes and market imperfections (convert to ecomomic
flows) and construct the projections.
Then we add pure economic values/drivers that are not tangible and direct (those previously
converted) as well as all benefits, some of which could be regarded as externalities*
Figure © The World Bank Group, 2015 All rights reserved. Source: https://ppp-certification.com/certification
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
38
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
Some key concepts (i)
• Benefits [and costs] have to be considered in the broad sense: direct or
indirect, internal and external [as well as tangible and intangible]
̵ Most of the costs are direct costs –and benefits- (such as the cost of the investment
itself, the public works), but the project may have other indirect costs and benefits
as well as positive and negative “externalities”.
̵ External benefits (or “externalities”) and costs are those that affect or benefit third
parties beyond the population to which the project is addressed in a first instance
o externalities: “the effect of production or consumption of goods and services imposes costs
or benefits on others which are not reflected in the prices charged for the goods and
services being provided”.
• When valuing project costs and benefits [other than tangible and direct], a
quantification problem can arise.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
39
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
Some key concepts (ii)
• Willingness to Pay: Willingness to pay represents the perceived value of the
benefits to users of the infrastructure
• Financially Viable Projects: Projects in which the expected revenues exceed
the costs of the project. Don’t confuse with:
• Economically Viable Projects: Projects in which the benefits that society
derives from the project are greater than the costs to society
• Dealing with Inflation: Cost-benefit Analysis is generally conducted using
projections of prices in real terms – that is, excluding inflation. Future prices
should be adjusted to remove any variation reflecting inflation.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
40
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
Valuing costs and need for adjustments
• Costs should reflect the best alternative use of the goods
(opportunity cost) to the extent to which it is possible
• Market prices are the best way to reflect the opportunity cost
̵ But in some circumstances they may not do so accurately due to market
imperfections (e.g. monopolistic situation), especially when it is a
regulated market or item.
̵ In this situation, shadow prices should be estimated and used instead of
the market price. Examples:
o If electricity prices are capped by regulation below the economic cost of producing
electricity, use the economic cost, not the capped price.
o Salaries are above the real economic price of the factor in high unemployment context with
minimum salary regulations.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
41
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
Valuing costs and need for adjustments (ii)
• Other opportunity cost adjustments
̵ There may be a cost to society even if there is no direct cash cost.
o Example: Public land or public property provided at not cost to the project should be
valued at market price to reflect the opportunity cost for government.
o If there is no alternative use for the asset, the cost is deemed to be zero (“sunk cost”, not
recoverable).
• The effect of taxes should be removed
̵ Taxes are part of the nominal cost (in terms of cash flows), but are not a cost to
society (but in fact are a revenue for the government).
o Example: Value-added tax on construction materials should be excluded, import duties, corporate taxes.
o Exception: There can be justification for including a tax used to correct an externality (for example, a
pollution tax), but also adjust the externality to avoid double counting.
• Assigning a monetary value to many intangible variables (such as quality of
life, security of a neighbourhood) is not an easy
̵ One approach is to determine willingness to pay:
o This depends on the perceived economic value and on the utility of the good
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
42
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
Types of costs and valuation approaches [in a
transportation project*]
Tangible
Costs
Intangible
Costs
Direct Costs
Indirect Costs
Examples:
• Personnel
• Materials and supplies
• Rentals (facilities/equipment)
• Capital purchases
• Land
• Volunteers
Valuation approaches (a selection)*:
• Wages and benefits
• Current expenses
• Fair market rents
Examples:
• General overhead
• Spillovercosts to third parties
• Environmental damage
• Compliance/client costs
Examples:
• Fear of harm
Valuation approaches:
• [None given in the Guide]
Examples:
• Loss of aesthetics
Valuation approaches:
• [None given in the Guide]
Valuation approaches (a selection)*:
• Estimation of impact or mitigation cost
* Full list is provided in guide table 3.1
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
43
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
Valuing benefits
• Quantifying benefits is especially challenging
̵ Benefits often relate to the “opportunity cost” concept
o For example, time savings generated by transportation projects
̵ In order to estimate direct benefits, the first step would be to research whether
there is available market data regarding the specific benefit.
̵ It can be useful to consider values from studies in other countries
o Although the value (such as willingness to pay) may differ between countries
̵ In cases in which benefits appear as cost savings, the quantification of a benefit is
implicit in the cost estimate of the alternatives under analysis
• What if it is decided not to quantify a specific benefit? (For example,
because it is not possible to quantify the benefit)
̵ Treat the benefit qualitatively
o Include the qualitative information in the analysis in addition to the quantitative results
o Explain how the benefit is linked to the authority’s strategic plan and global strategic
objectives
o [note: in fact the same can be said of some indirect costs]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
44
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
Types of benefits and valuation approaches
Tangible
Benefits
Intangible
Benefits
Direct Benefits
Indirect Benefits
Examples:
• Goods and services
• Increased production or profits/lifetime
earnings
• Time saved
Examples:
• Cost savings
• Spill-over impacts to third parties
• Multiplier effects
Valuation approaches (a selection)*:
• Fair market value or willingness to pay
• Increased productivity/earnings
• After-tax wage rate
Valuation approaches (a selection)*:
• Difference between before and after action
• Estimated impact or mitigation of impact
• Additional indirect jobs created
Examples:
• Lives saved
• Healthier citizens
• Quality of life
• Aesthetics
Examples:
• Preservation of community
• Increased self-esteem
Valuation approaches (a selection)*:
• Lifetime earnings
Valuation approaches:
• [None given in the Guide]
* Full list is provided in guide table 3.1
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
45
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
Performance Indicators
Economic Net Present Value
(eNPV)
The projected costs and benefits,
discounted using a suitable discount
rate.
Should be positive, indicating
benefits are higher than costs, after
allowing for differences in timing.
Economic Internal Rate of
Return (eIRR)
The discount rate that makes the
NPV equal to zero.
• In some cases, eNPV is not the most appropriate indicator, as it does not consider
the volume of resources employed.
̵ If alternatives have significant differences in resource consumption, eIRR may be more appropriate for the
selection. In these circumstances, consider the results based on both eNPV and eIRR, as well as any
qualitative analysis.
• Note1: A third indicator, not discussed in the Guide, is the benefit/cost ratio (BCR), which is the ratio of benefits in net present
value terms to costs in net present value terms, and should be greater than 1 (that is, benefits should outweigh costs).
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
46
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
The Discount Rate
• Selection of the discount rate is a key issue to ensure the eNPV
is properly calculated in terms of opportunity costs.
̵ There is no universal consensus on the determination of this discount rate.
̵ It may be appropriate to conduct sensitivity analysis using a range of
different discount rates.
̵ Some governments identify and publish a standard rate to be used and, in
some cases, also publish the appropriate range for sensitivity analysis.
–Example: In Australian transport projects a standard practice is to use a 7 percent real
discount rate as the base case, and to conduct sensitivity tests using 4 percent and 10
percent real discount rates.
̵ “As CBA evaluates the economic merit of a project regardless of how it is
delivered, the fact that the project might become a PPP does not affect the
discount rate used”.
̵ Note: although not mentioned in the Guide, it is important to use a
consistent discount rate method across projects.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
47
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
Usual approaches to the Discount Rate
Use the opportunity cost of capital
• The analysis is dealing with public assets, so the discount rate could be the
public debt interest rate (at the longest term available).
• Remove inflation to establish the rate in real terms.
Use an approximation of the Social Time Preference Rate
• This is “the value that society attaches to present, as opposed to future,
consumption”.
• This approach is advised or prescribed in a number of countries such as the
United Kingdom.
Use estimated or targeted future real GDP growth
• Implies that only projects which increase society’s welfare (at least equal to
the economy’s expected or targeted growth rate) will be developed
• All projects with a positive NPV are expected to at least help the GDP grow as
forecast.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
48
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
Note to delegates: this will be discussed in class
Example for discussion
• Considering the Australian standard described before, consider the following
cost benefit analysis from a hypothetical road project
̵ How would you interpret this analysis?
̵ What aspects of the analysis might have offered particular challenges?
̵ Is this project worthy of proceeding?
Present Value ($m)
Costs
Benefits
At 4%
Discount Rate
Capital Costs
$
3,480
O&M Costs (30 year evaluation period) $
304
Total Costs
$
3,784
Travel Time Savings
$
3,801
Vehicle Operating Cost Savings
$
1,478
Crash cost savings
$
315
Reduced pollution
$
80
Increased economic activity
$
1,820
Residual Value
$
125
Total Benefits
$
7,617
Net Present Value (NPV)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
$
3,833
At 7%
Discount Rate
$
3,283
$
287
$
3,570
$
2,534
$
985
$
210
$
53
$
1,213
$
83
$
5,078
$
#5 Economic Soundness
At 10%
Discount Rate
$
3,053
$
267
$
3,320
$
1,267
$
493
$
105
$
27
$
607
$
42
$
2,539
1,508 -$
781
49
Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis:
Incorporating risk and uncertainty
• The risks that are inherent to a project have to be considered
and included in the appraisal.
̵ Can be done through:
oProper adjustments by probability.
oShowing the ranges of values for certain sensitivities/future movements .
oShowing deviations on critical factors and variables.
̵ For this purpose, risks have to be quantitatively evaluated, incorporating
the "expected values" of the risks into the analysis .
oThe expected value of a risk is the product of the likelihood of the risk occurring
by the size or amount of the outcome (in monetized terms).
oThis should be done for all relevant or "critical" risks whose likelihood and
outcome can be reasonably estimated.
• See further Chapter 4 of the Guide and The Green Book by HM
Treasury (UK).
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
50
Quiz - Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis
7-Using the Cost-Benefit Analysis technique, which is the best
technical solution for a project?
A. Lowest Net Present Value in economic terms or lowest economic
Internal Rate of Return.
B. Highest Net Present Value in economic terms or highest economic
Internal Rate of Return.
C. Lowest Net Present Value in economic terms or highest economic
Internal Rate of Return.
D. Highest Net Present Value in economic terms or lowest economic
Internal Rate of Return.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
51
Quiz - Introduction to Cost-benefit Analysis
8-Which describes “opportunity costs” in a Cost-Benefit
Analysis?
A. The value of benefits or costs where no competitive or explicit market
prices exist.
B. The best alternative use of assets or capital.
C. Those that affect third parties beyond the population to which the
project is addressed in the first instance.
D. The cost of the investment itself.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#5 Economic Soundness
52
6
Scoping the PPP Project and
testing PPP suitability (PPP
screening)
Guide Sections
#9, #10, #14
53
Scoping the PPP Project: considerations and
benefits
• Scoping the PPP project means defining the work to be done by
the future private partner to deliver the project objectives:
̵ Some portions of the project’s technical scope may be removed from the
PPP project.
–Example: In a bus rapid transit project, the future PPP may include the bus way, bus stops
and depots but exclude the vehicles.
̵ It includes defining the scope of the service or business that will be the
private sector’s responsibility.
–Example: Does it include or exclude tariff collection?
̵ This should be expressed as a service standard defining what will be done,
to what quality levels, and by whom.
• Many projects fail due to poor scoping in the early phases.
• A definitive decision on the contract scope is sometimes
postponed to appraisal phase.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
54
Scoping the PPP Project: Example
• The Delhi Airport Metro Express was conceived as a dedicated
metro line between the city and its airport.
• The Delhi Metro Rail Corporation, which was the government
authority responsible for the project, proposed to undertake all
the civil works itself, including construction of the necessary
viaduct, tunnels and the stations.
• DMRC proposed a PPP for the delivery and operation of the
operating systems—primarily the track, signals, power.
distribution system and rolling stock—and for paying operating
expenses.
• Hence the civil works were a significant part of the project, but
were outside the PPP scope.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
55
Scoping the PPP Project: Reducing uncertainty
• Robust PPP scoping delivers benefits by reducing uncertainty:
̵ More accurate risk calculations;
̵ Reduced control costs;
̵ More effective teams (through improved confidence); and
̵ Improved planning.
• Questions to assist in defining PPP scope :
̵ Who are the parties ultimately involved?
̵ What do the parties want to achieve?
̵ What is it that each party is interested in?
̵ Which way (how) is each party’s work to be done?
̵ What resources are required?
̵ When does it have to be done?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
56
Testing PPP Suitability and Affordability:
Introduction
• If a project is economically sound, the government must
determine whether the project makes sense as a PPP
̵ This avoids the risk of sinking resources into the analysis and structuring of
a non-feasible PPP project.
̵ The result of the suitability test may be one of the following;
oThe project appears to be sound as a PPP and can move on to the next stage.
oThe project is not suitable as a PPP. Appraising the project for traditional.
procurement methods if a public budget is available.
oThe project is missing relevant information, or there is a need to clarify some
uncertainties. Record the project’s weaknesses and recommend further analysis.
• Screening for PPP suitability and affordability ensures that:
̵ the project is better prepared for procurement.
̵ uncertainties are identified.
̵ necessary resources and schedules are duly accommodated for a more
reliable procurement process.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
57
Testing PPP Suitability and Affordability:
Process
PPP Suitability Test
Project is suitable to be
a PPP
Go to Appraisal
Project is not suitable
to be a PPP
Dismiss as a PPP and
appraise its
implementation as a
publicly funded project
Information is missing
or there are
uncertainties requiring
clarification
Recommend additional
studies before moving
to the next stage
Figure adapted from PPP Certification Guide © The World Bank Group, 2015 All rights reserved. Source: https://pppcertification.com/certification
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
58
Testing PPP Suitability and Affordability:
Determining PPP suitability
̵ Key questions for determining PPP suitability:
o Are there any significant risks or uncertainties that cannot be managed by a private partner?
–Examples: Non-availability of the land/right of way and land acquisition cost overrun
o Can the project be accommodated within the legal framework as a PPP? Have all relevant laws
been taken into consideration?
o Is the project’s size big enough to justify PPP transaction costs? Is it not too big for the market?
Can local construction companies take it on? Can it be financed?
o Would there be investor market appetite? What precedents transactions are there in the
country/region/similar countries?
o Does it make sense to bundle construction and operations and/or maintenance in a single
contract?
o Are the output requirements clearly identifiable?
̵ Extra note (not described in the PPP Guide):
–Many of these questions don’t have a simple answer but it is a question of degree and
judgement. Also, the project may be made suitable for a PPP by refining the scope of the
contract or the risk allocation.
–Some countries opt for a semiquantitative approach through MCA, scoring these and/or other criteria and
looking for a final score
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
59
Testing PPP Suitability – Example:
A waste incineration project (1)
• Are there any significant risks or uncertainties that cannot be
managed by a private partner?
̵ ? Can a private partner take the following risks? (If not, we should see
whether they can be assumed by the government).
oThe risk that the composition of the incoming differs from that expected.
oThe risk that the chosen technology does not perform to expectations.
oThe risk that emissions from the plant breach environmental limits.
• Can the project be accommodated within the legal framework
as a PPP? Have all relevant laws been taken into consideration?
̵ ? Does the law allow private operation of an incineration plant?
̵ (if not, we should abandon –or starting a legal change process)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
60
Testing PPP Suitability – Example:
A waste incineration project (2)
• Is the project’s size big enough to justify PPP transaction costs?
Is it not too big for the market? Can local construction
companies take it on? Can it be financed?
̵ ? What are the expected capital and operating costs? Are they too big for
the construction and finance markets, or too small to justify a PPP?
̵ (if a project is too big to be privately financed, we should see whether the
government can assume directly financing a part of the CapEx)
• Would there be investor market appetite? What precedents
transactions are there in the country/region/similar countries?
̵ ? Has a market sounding been conducted?
̵ ? Have international PPP experts been consulted?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
61
Testing PPP Suitability – Example:
A waste incineration project (3)
• Does it make sense to bundle construction and operations
and/or maintenance in a single contract?
̵  In a technically challenging project, it is beneficial to have the
technology provider and the proposed operator work together through the
construction and start-up of the project to ensure that it will operate as
expected.
• Are the output requirements clearly identifiable?
̵  The requirements can be defined as capacity for treating a specified
volume of waste meeting specified environmental performance outcomes
and certain energy production per Ton treated.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
62
Testing PPP Suitability and Affordability:
Determining Affordability
• If the project is developed as a PPP, can the public sector afford
the necessary payments (Capex and Opex)? Consider:
1.
o
2.
–
3.
–
Are the required user charges and/or long-term call on the government
budget are affordable?
This is relevant regardless of the chosen delivery method, and should be
considered prior to PPP screening.
If the answer to question 1 is “No”, are innovative structures available
that can make the project affordable if delivered as a PPP?
Example: synergistic commercial development opportunities in a PPP model
If the project is affordable in the long term, what about the short term?
Are there constraints on government financing such that, even though
the project is affordable in the long term, the government cannot
finance its investment in the project in the short term?
Example: Borrowing restrictions
oIf the answer is “yes”, can a PPP can be structured to overcome that issue?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
63
The Screening Report
• It is good practice to complete a report containing at least the following
sections before entering the full appraisal process and, specifically, before
committing staff and/or hiring advisors.
Executive summary and recommendations
Project description: Outline of technical solution
Needs/benefits of the project and suitability of the solution proposed
PPP suitability: Justification for the use of a PPP process
Affordability: Economic and financial pre-analysis
Legal and regulatory issues
Readiness of the project and its status, including stakeholder identification
Information availability
Outline of the project management plan
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
64
Quiz - Scoping the PPP Project and
testing PPP suitability (PPP screening)
9-What does ‘Scoping the PPP project’ mean?
A. Screen the project for PPP suitability.
B. Test the project for economic sense and soundness.
C. Define the work that must be done by the future private partner to
deliver the project.
D. Conduct a preliminary financial analysis to pre-test affordability.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#6 Scoping the PPP Project
65
7
Project Management Plan
and Project Governance.
Stakeholders identification
and communication
Guide Sections
#11, #12
66
Project Management Plan and Project
Governance Considerations
• Before a decision is made to move to the next stage (appraisal),
a list of tasks and a schedule should be developed. This will:
̵ Serve as the basis for the Request for Proposals for external advisors, if
needed; and
̵ Assist the government, in the Appraisal Phase by identifying any
consequences or risks associated with the proposed schedule.
• Stakeholder management and communication are paramount:
Early engagement with the decision-makers is a key factor in
the success of the final approval process (especially in terms of
timing) [→ see “identifying stakeholders”]
• The availability of a project team must be confirmed. The need
for external capabilities should be clearly identified and the
costs of such services estimated so as to provide a budget
estimate → see #8 assessing capabilities and hiring advisors.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#7 Project Management Plan
67
Project Management Plan: Contents
Detailed work
program for
Appraisal Process
• List of tasks.
• Estimated Timelines.
• Target dates.
• Intermediate dates.
• Duration of the next
phase.
• Resources required
(staff, advisors) and
budget estimate.
Precedent
Conditions and risk
• Describe precedent
conditions such as:
• Permits.
• Environmental
approvals.
• Land availability.
• Legal due diligence
required.
• Sort out weaknesses
of information and
determine main risks
and plan risk strategy.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
Preliminary
program of process
to Contract Award
• Overall timetable.
• Benchmark against
precedents.
• Enables inclusion of
the project properly
in overall PPP
pipeline.
Approval Process
• Sign-offs/engaging
with decisionmakers.
• Identify / plan
Approvals.
• Identify other
stakeholders and
develop
communication
strategy/plan.
#7 Project Management Plan
68
Quiz - Project Management Plan
10-Which of the following should be included in a Project
Management Plan prepared during the Project Identification and
Screening Phase?
1.
2.
3.
4.
A overall timetable to contract award.
The proposed risk allocation for the PPP contract.
Information on land availability.
Information on resources required for the Appraisal Phase.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Only 1, 2 and 3 should be included.
Only 1, 2 and 4 should be included.
Only 1, 3 and 4 should be included.
Only 2, 3 and 4 should be included.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#7 Project Management Plan
69
Identifying Stakeholders and Developing
the Communication Strategy (1)
• Identify critical stakeholder groups early in the project process
• Communication with stakeholders is essential to:
̵ Facilitate their understanding of the process.
̵ Gain social, business and political support for the project.
̵ Attract potential investors.
̵ Reduce risks for the project.
• Map stakeholders’ needs, concerns, worries, and interests:
̵ This enables project managers to communicate the appropriate
information which addresses each stakeholder’s needs..
• The number of stakeholders and their interests will change
through the project.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#7 Project Management Plan
70
Identifying Stakeholders and Developing
the Communication Strategy (2)
• Citizens often expect active involvement in projects:
̵ Affected groups may be sufficiently opposed that they take action and can
delay or even halt a project.
̵ Academic conferences, citizens' summits, etc. can be used to enlarge
public support.
̵ If managed well, stakeholders can be eager promoters of projects
–Example 1: Alandur Sewerage Project, India
» Early involvement of the public through surveys and citizens’ committees coupled
with targeted outreach explaining the project costs, benefits, and tariffs.
» The project proceeded smoothly, with citizens agreeing to pay a one-time
connection fee, and thereby contributing 29 percent of the financing.
–Example 2: Timarpur-Okhla Integrated Solid Waste Management Project, India
» Incineration of waste and raised questions about air pollution.
» Public hearings addressed substantial doubts held by the public regarding the
project.
» This education process ensured that the public appreciated the benefits of the
project.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#7 Project Management Plan
71
Who are the Stakeholders? Benefits of
Stakeholder Identification & Communication
External Stakeholders
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Banks
Investment funds
Government and multilateral funders
Public service users
Society in general
The press
Other government agencies
• Municipal/State government
• Federal government
• Auditors and state monitoring
agencies
• Regulatory agencies
• Legislators
Party leaders
Associations
Labour unions
Non-governmental organizations
[developers/contractors]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
Internal Stakeholders
• Public sector officers and employees linked,
directly or indirectly, to the project cycle and
who will monitor or interface with the project.
• Directly involved in the project, rather than an
interest to be satisfied.
Benefits of Stakeholder Identification &
Communication
• Prevention of delays in project implementation.
• Evidence is provided of government
commitment to the project.
• Evidence is provided of process credibility.
• Stakeholders' contributions can be considered
in the project’s design.
• Support of stakeholders is more likely.
• The government can effectively provide
information in response to queries.
#7 Project Management Plan
72
Communicating with Stakeholders
• Different stakeholders need different approaches.
• It may be necessary to communicate with stakeholders about
the fact that the project is a PPP and the implications of this.
̵ Some key stakeholders might neither know nor care that the project is a
PPP, but communication with them to gain their support can be vital.
̵ In other cases, delivery of the project as a PPP may be a cause of
considerable concern for some external stakeholders.
• Lack of or poor communication can feed false rumours and
concerns which may undermine the success of a project.
̵ Bring information to the forefront and properly evaluate and transmit it.
• Ensure all stakeholders receive equal information and no
potential bidder is unintentionally provided with an unfair
competitive advantage.
̵ Communication must be carefully coordinated and transparent.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#7 Project Management Plan
73
The Communication Strategy
• The communication strategy is
very important to promote
engagement and mitigate
opposition to the project.
̵ A communication plan should be
designed at an early stage of the
screening exercise.
̵ It should be implemented by a
dedicated and experienced team.
• Successful implementation of the
communication plan can
immensely reduce the political
risks and attract the stakeholder
support necessary for effective
procurement.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
Content of the Communication Plan
• Identification of all the interest groups to
which communication should be directed.
• Explanation of the main concepts to be
communicated, drawing on project
elements such as:
• Project outcomes
• The need being meet
• The people being served
• Identification of the media used to reach
the groups identified.
• The main characteristics of the
communication pieces, preferably specific
to each group identified.
• Identification of project team members
who will be prime sources of information
for the general public.
• A basic strategy for maintaining good
relationships with the press.
#7 Project Management Plan
74
Stakeholder Communication in this
Phase – An Example
• The large and complex Melbourne Metro project (capital cost approx. USD 6 billion)
was first proposed in March 2008.
• During the project’s options evaluation and refinement phases in 2009-2010, a twostage engagement process was undertaken to seek external views and feedback:
̵ Stage 1 (October 2009 to June 2010) focused on seeking feedback to the question: “Given the
alignment and station locations set out in the government’s transport plan, what are your
views on this?” Feedback was gathered primarily through direct meetings with key
stakeholders and land users in the vicinity of the proposed stations.
̵ Stage 2 (July to September 2010) provided the public and stakeholders with the opportunity
to learn more about the preferred alignment and station locations and provide comment. The
project website made high-level project materials available for viewing and download. A 10
part questionnaire was provided online for the community to provide direct feedback. This
resulted in more than 340 responses with more than 93 per cent supporting the project
overall. A series of stakeholder briefings with peak bodies and community groups were also
held to outline the proposed options and gather direct feedback to assist in design
development.
Source: Victoria State Government, Melbourne Metro Business Case, available at http://metrotunnel.vic.gov.au/library/businesscase
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#7 Project Management Plan
75
Quiz - Stakeholder Communication and Identification
11-Which of the following are benefits of stakeholder
communication and identification during the Project
Identification and Screening Phase?
1.
2.
3.
4.
Evidence is provided of government commitment to the project.
Support of stakeholders is more likely.
Prevention of delays in project implementation
Communicating with stakeholders early removes the need to
communicate with them in the more intense later phases of the project.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Only 1, 2 and 3 are benefits.
Only 1, 2 and 4 are benefits.
Only 1, 3 and 4 are benefits.
Only 2, 3 and 4 are benefits.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#7 Project Management Plan
76
8
Assessing Capabilities and
Needs, Building the Project
Team and Hiring Advisors
Guide Sections
#13
77
Assessing Capabilities and Hiring Advisors –
Introduction. Project leader
• During the screening, a “project team” for the Appraisal Phase (and
potentially for structuring) should be defined:
̵ Otherwise, costs for advisors or an inability to conduct the necessary studies during
appraisal may prevent the project moving ahead as a PPP.
̵ A detailed staffing plan and the process of hiring advisors will be developed after
the decision is made to move forward.
• The public sector will need to appoint a project leader:
̵ The project leader must have the expertise to manage its advisors and the
stakeholder processes professionally.
o Poor management of these aspects is a common cause of project failure.
̵ The project leader should have the following roles and capabilities:
o Coordinate all studies from the different fields of expertise.
o Control and oversee the results of the studies.
o Coordinate between external advisors and the procuring authority (when the appraisal is led
by a PPP unit); and
o Manage public sector decision-making processes to obtain decisions in a reasonable
timeframe.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#8 Assessing Capabilities and Needs
78
Process for Assessing Capabilities and
Needs
• What capabilities are needed?
• Are there sufficient internal capacities
within the procuring authority?
̵ If so, can internal capabilities be dedicated
to the appraisal, or are there other higher
priorities?
̵ If not, is there a resource (or resources)
available to lead the appraisal?
• Which consultants should be hired, and
for what tasks?
̵ This requires terms of reference.
̵ How should they be hired?
o Separate contracts for each discipline, or one
multidisciplinary team?
• What will the cost be (time and fees) to
properly analyze and procure the
project?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
Do I have the internal capacities
to deliver the appraisal?
Yes
Do I have resources to
dedicate to the
appraisal?
Yes
No
No*
Do I have an appropriate
person available to lead the
appraisal?
Yes
No
Launch a
tender to hire
external
advisors
Launch a
tender to hire
a team leader
and external
advisors
Proceed with appraisal
Figure adapted from PPP Certification Guide © The World Bank Group,
2015 All rights reserved. Source: https://ppp-certification.com/certification
*This arrow faces the wrong way in the Guide.
#8 Assessing Capabilities and Needs
79
Common Capabilities Needed to Develop the
Appraisal Studies
Technical:
Environmental:
Economic:
Financial:
Legal:
• In charge of the project’s design, with expertise in the type of infrastructure
that is the subject of the contract
• Expertise in the technical aspects of the services involved.
• Appraises environmental impacts
• Should have relevant expertise / experience in environmental analysis.
• Expertise in economic appraisal, preferably in the same sector/ infrastructure
or service type.
•Expertise in PPP financial analysis, preferably in the same sector/infrastructure or service type
•Knowledge of financing similar PPP projects
•Expertise in contract risk structuring and payment mechanisms, preferably in the same
sector/infrastructure or service type.
•Expertise in public law / administrative framework
•Experience in drafting PPP contracts. Although drafting will not occur yet, knowledge of PPP contracts
enables proper assessment of the existing legal framework
•For a PPP of existing operations, must also look at existing contracts, legal actions, loan contracts, etc.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#8 Assessing Capabilities and Needs
80
Requests for Advisors and ways to fund
• The screening report should describe the capabilities needed for the full
appraisal and justify the need for advisors.
• It is essential that advisors have previous PPP and general infrastructure
experience.
̵ They should have a clear understanding of current market conditions.
• When planning to engage advisors, the public sector should:
̵ Describe the scope of the required advisory roles and expertise, and the person, or
persons, to act as team leader(s)
̵ Suggest a budget for hiring the advisors and analyse funding options
o Don’t underestimate the costs of project preparation.
o Development Finance Institutions and donor organizations have established facilities in
many regions to meet project preparation costs including the hiring of advisors.
o A revolving project development fund established and managed by the government is
another approach, with the possibility of with donor support. The winning bidders refund
the costs at contract signing, recycling funds back to other public authorities.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#8 Assessing Capabilities and Needs
81
Hiring Advisors – Structure of the
Procurement / scope of contracts
• Advisors can be procured as a group/consortium under a single
contract, or procured separately
̵ A single integrated team ensures cohesion and coordination of all the tasks.
̵ Separating the procurement allows government to select the best advisor in
each discipline, but demands more government time and resources.
̵ Time constraints may make it advisable to appoint a single team under one
contract.
̵ A single team may be better coordinated, more efficient and better
prepared to work together from the outset.
̵ When technical advice is important (for example, if the authority plans to
undertake detailed design work), it may be best to separate that task to
ensure that the best technical solution is designed and the selection of
technical experts is not influenced by the procurement of PPP advisors.
̵ Some authorities select a separate technical team but a joint financial and
legal team, as these two areas are more clearly linked and overlap.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#8 Assessing Capabilities and Needs
82
Structure of the Advisory Team –
Examples
• The Philippines:
̵ The government generally appoints integrated teams of advisors for its PPP
projects, rather than appointing each advisor individually.
̵ The central PPP Unit has established a panel of transaction advisors who
can be appointed to advise on projects supported by the government’s
Project Development and Monitoring Fund.
oMost of the panel members are consortia made up of several firms.
oIn some cases, the consortium is a mix of Philippines and international advisors,
in other cases the consortium consists entirely of international advisers.
• Thailand:
̵ Advisors engaged by government must be on a register maintained by the
Thai Consulting Center, which was established by the Ministry of Finance.
̵ The government generally appoints a single advisory firm, which subcontracts other firms as required to provide the full advisory skill set
required for the project .
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#8 Assessing Capabilities and Needs
83
Hiring Advisors – Term and Timing of
the Advisors’ Appointment
• The authority can:
̵ Enter into one contract to cover all the processes through to contract execution, or
̵ Appoint advisors only for the Appraisal Phase and decide later on the selection of
advisors for later phases.
• It is often more appropriate to enter into one contract for all processes:
̵ PPP preparation through structuring and tendering is a progressive process.
• If there are no time constraints or there are doubts as to whether the
project is suitable to be a PPP, it may be sensible to limit the advisory
contract or contracts to the Appraisal Phase:
̵ This also removes the potential conflict of interest that exists because advisors
engaged for the entire project will benefit if the project proceeds.
̵ Alternatively, provide an option for the procuring authority to retain the advisors
for the next stage and give some flexibility for advisory firms to change team
members.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#8 Assessing Capabilities and Needs
84
Hiring Advisors – Other issues
• The selection process should consider the advisors' technical
capability and experience of working on similar projects in
addition to price:
̵ International experience is a must, especially in countries in the early
stages of PPP development.
oThis has to be enriched with adequate local knowledge.
• There will always be some things that a third party adviser
cannot do, such as approving advisors’ invoices on behalf of the
procuring authority:
̵ The procuring authority must always have staff to perform these functions.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#8 Assessing Capabilities and Needs
85
Selecting the Advisory Team – Examples
• The Philippines:
̵ Advisors submit separate technical and financial proposals.
̵ The technical proposals are opened first and evaluated against a set of requirements.
̵ The financial proposals for all advisors meeting the technical requirements are opened .
̵ The advisor with the lowest cost amongst those meeting the technical requirements is
awarded the role.
• Thailand (current process in early 2017):
̵ The government’s expected cost of the advisory work is publicly disclosed before the advisors
bid for the role.
̵ The advisors’ technical responses are evaluated against a set of criteria.
̵ The price offered by the advisor with the highest ranked technical proposal is then
considered.
̵ If necessary (for example, because the price offered exceeds government’s expected cost),
the price is negotiated between the government and the advisor.
o If the negotiations fail, the government can consider the price offered by the advisor with the second
ranked technical proposal.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#8 Assessing Capabilities and Needs
86
Quiz - Assessing Capabilities and Needs, Building
the Project Team and Hiring Advisors
12-Which of the following statements about the role of the
Project Leader during the Appraisal Phase are true?
A. An experienced external advisor should be appointed as Project Leader
to lead the appraisal.
B. The Project Leader is responsible for managing the decision-making
processes between the procuring authority and its private partners.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Only 1 is true.
Only 2 is true.
Both 1 and 2 are true.
Neither 1 or 2 is true.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#8 Assessing Capabilities and Needs
87
9
Outcomes of the Project
Identification and Screening
Phase
Guide Sections
#15
88
Outcomes of the Project Identification
and Screening Phase
• There are three possible outcomes of this phase:
̵ Move on to the next stage (the project appears to be economically sound
and is a suitable PPP candidate);
̵ The project is not suitable to be a PPP; or
̵ Since some relevant information is missing, or there is a need to clarify
some constraints or dependencies, further analysis should be undertaken.
• The key outputs from the process are:
̵ Outline of technical solution;
̵ Economic and financial pre-analysis (which might be a full analysis
depending on the available information, enabling the decision to invest);
̵ Screening report or justification of PPP choice;
̵ Outline of project management plan (work program); and
̵ Schedule for the pre-tender work, team structure, stakeholder
identification, and other project governance strategy matters.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Identification & Screening
#9 Outcomes
89
In collaboration with
Contact
Andres Rebollo
arebollo@k-infrastructure.com
Richard Foster
richard@fosterinfrastructure.com
This material is intellectual property of Knowledge Infrastructure
and Foster Infrastructure.
It may be only used by the client referred to on the front page of
the document.
Dissemination of this material to any third party other than the
client is not allowed.
90
Knowledge Infrastructure, S.L. ©
Foster Infrastructure Pty Ltd ©
October 2020
This material is intellectual property of Knowledge
Infrastructure and Foster Infrastructure.
Dissemination of this material to any third party by
candidates or by the institution is not allowed without prior
consent by K-Infra in writing.
The APMG PPP Certification Program is a registered
Trade Mark of The APM Group Limited. All rights
reserved.
This document is subject to
intellectual property rights and it
its contents cannot be copied,
distributed or transferred without
prior explicit consent by K-infra.
CP3P – Practitioner
Course
Chapter 4
Appraising PPP Projects
Prepared by
1
User guidelines
• [For digital version in LMS] You will have to go through all slides and attempt
all quizzes. You will have three attempts for solving satisfactorily the quizzes
with a minimum overall mark.
• Slides in light blue colour are examples or extra information not included in
the PPP Guide. Slides dedicated to quizzes are in light brown colour.
• Some extra info or extra explanations (not included in the Guide) are
provided in the form of “notes”.
• Remember that as in the exam and as related to the examples of PPP Guide,
the information of examples are not subject to exam.
• Some additional explanations or own nuances to the original PPP Guide are
provided in [brackets].
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
2
Learning objectives
• The main activities required to detail the scope of the PPP project,
design its technical requirements, and assess technical risks
• The main issues involved in estimating the costs of the private partner
and adjusting them for risk, whenever appropriate
• The basic elements required to design a preliminary contract
structure
• The general tasks related to developing a financial model, from the
government’s perspective
• The basic techniques and good practices required to produce a series
of feasibility assessments of the technical, commercial, economic,
environmental, social, legal, and fiscal dimensions of the project
• The basic structure of alternative procurement routes and how they
relate to the outcomes of the tender process
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
3
Contents
Objectives and overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope, designing
technical requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a Preliminary
Structure of the PPP
Environmental feasibility
Developing the Financial
Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the Technical
Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Money
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and checking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
4
0
Objectives and overview
Guide Sections
#1, #2, #3
5
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Fiscal Feasibility
• Where we are in the process
• Objectives of this Phase
• Overview of Appraisal Phase
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#0 Objectives
6
Where we are in the process
Identifying
projects
Appraising
projects
Structuring
tender &
contract
Tender &
award
Delivering &
commissioning
Operating &
maintaining
• The contract is prestructured and Financial
Model and Technical
Requirements are designed
• The project’s feasibility is
tested in several dimensions
such as affordability and
commercial feasibility
• The project’s socioenvironmental impacts are
identified
• PPP suitability is confirmed
(VfM)
• The procurement route is
decided
• The decision to procure is
made (“green light decision’)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#0 Objectives
7
Objectives of this Phase
Appraising means answering the following
• Is it sensible, from an economic perspective, to implement the
project?
• Is it practical to procure the project as a PPP? How much will it
cost? Is it affordable from the government’s perspective?
• Is there adequate market interest and capability to deliver this
project?
• What are the main obstacles for the project’s implementation
(both the implementation of the technical solution and
implementation of the preferred delivery method which may be
a traditional delivery or delivery as a PPP)? Can they be
overcome in a cost-effective manner? How?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#0 Objectives
8
Objectives of this phase (2)
• Appraisal is naturally progressive
̵ Some pieces have already been developed in identification
̵ Some will be detailed during structuring
• Appraisal helps to filter out projects against the feasibility
criteria (The gateway process avoids sinking resources into poor
projects or failing in delivery)
• Projects may be feasible (economically, technically) but not
suitable for PPP delivery
• We are contributing to the structuring and moving towards the
contract definition → see later slide “deliverables” [related to contract
production]
• The procurement and investment decisions are made in this
phase → see slide 10
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#0 Objectives
9
Objectives (3) - Deliverables of this Phase
• The technical requirements of the project, produced as a part of
the technical feasibility exercise
• The financial model, which organizes the financial assumptions
and forecasts relevant financial information, used for the
commercial feasibility exercise and for some other evaluations
• The preliminary contract structure, which identifies and
allocates risks as well as defining the essential aspects of the
revenue regime and the payment mechanism
• A procurement strategy that identifies the competitive selection
process that will be refined during the Structuring Phase
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#0 Objectives
10
Objectives (4) - Procurement Decision
To confirm the procurement decision (worth procuring and worth
procuring as a PPP), the team need to:
• Confirm that the project is worth procuring (the investment decision)
• Identify whether the project, implemented as a PPP, is likely to deliver
Value for Money
• Develop a reliable feasibility assessment (often referred to as the
“business case”) that allows the government to make an informed
and defendable decision to move forward (or to abort the project)
• Ensure that the project faces no definitive or blocking obstacles to its
launch and, if it faces major threats, develop a general plan of action
to be put in place to overcome those barriers
• Establish the basics of the contract structure that will be refined
during the Structuring Phase
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#0 Objectives
11
Overview of Appraisal Phase
• The Appraisal Phase consists of a set of multidisciplinary assessments to
evaluate the project against a set of feasibility criteria
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#0 Objectives
12
Overview (2)
• Key elements describing the project are progressively detailed
̵ Technical requirements
̵ Contract pre-structure
̵ Financial model
• These elements are tested through several inter-related
feasibility assessments
• During this phase, a number of activities are carried so as to
“prepare” the Project (advancing matters and mitigating project
risks)
̵ Preparation activities will continue during the structuring phase
• Appraisal guidelines provide a benefit by enabling a robust and
consistent approach
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#0 Objectives
13
Quiz - Objectives of Appraisal Phase
1-Which is NOT true about this phase (Appraisal)?
A. Appraisal is naturally progressive
B. It helps to filter the Project: the gateway process avoids sinking
resources into poor projects and failing in delivery
C. Projects that are feasible are also suitable for PPP delivery
D. The procurement decision is taken in this phase
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#0 Objectives
14
Quiz - Deliverables
2-Which one describes deliverables of appraisal phase?
A. Technical requirements, financial model, preliminary contract
structure and request for proposals
B. Technical requirements, financial model, preliminary contract
structure and procurement strategy
C. Technical requirements, financial model, preliminary contract
structure and request for qualifications
D. Technical requirements, financial model, the contract in draft
and procurement strategy
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#0 Objectives
15
Quiz - Objectives of appraisal
3-Which is NOT a deliverable of the appraisal phase?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Financial model
Technical requirements
Preliminary contract structure
The RFP and RFQ
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#0 Objectives
16
Detailing scope, designing
technical requirements and
assessing costs
Guide Sections
#4
17
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
• Developing the Scope of the contract
• Designing the Technical Requirements
• Consideration of Risk matters
• Estimating Risk-Adjusted Costs
• Main outputs and Key Points on Project Scope,
Technical Requirements and Cost
Fiscal Feasibility
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
18
#1 Developing the Scope of the contract
• The basic scope is provided in the Identification Phase
• Remember: certain obligations or services may be given to
other parties or reserved to the public sector
̵ Health/hospitals: clinical services may or may not be included in the
contract scope ; soft services may or may not be included
̵ Transport/rail: operations may or may not be included; the scope may
include full infrastructure or only certain elements
• The scope decision/definition
̵ Delineates the boundaries and interfaces between the public and private
sectors
̵ Defines the general framework from which to outline the technical and
performance requirements
̵ Provides the context to decide upon the revenue regime which will form
the basis of the financial and risk structure of the PPP
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
19
#2 Designing the Technical Requirements
• Technical requirements lie at the heart of the contract design
• The project team should develop enough technical detail to allow
precise definition of the design of the infrastructure, without being
too prescriptive
• Costs are assessed based on the technical requirements, providing a
key input to the commercial feasibility
• Detailed Technical Requirements allow bidders to accurately assess
the technical risks and price the service
• Benchmark projects (when available) are a convenient source of
information on requirements and costs
• The technical requirements:
̵ should be consistent with applicable regulatory standards and policy directives
oe.g. minimum size of a classroom; safety regulations in roads
̵ Depend on the project type/sector, [scope defined], contract type, and legal
requirements
̵ Are typically composed of a project design, construction and performance
requirements
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
20
#2 Designing the Technical Requirements
- Project Design & Construction Requirements
• The procuring authority can choose from a number of design approaches:
̵ functional design
̵ reference design
̵ full design and construction prescriptions
• The first two approaches are most common:
̵ They are consistent with PPPs focusing on outputs/services, allowing flexibility for
innovation and efficiency
̵ Too much prescription hinders innovation
o Prescription may be appropriate if:
–the project is simple in technical terms or
–the Procuring Authority knows the optimal means and methods of meeting the need
o Requires further work during Structuring Phase
• A minimum level of detail is always needed to allow for:
̵ Identification of the key design requirements that will later be included in the PPP
contract as the specifications for construction of the infrastructure, including time
requirements
̵ A reasonably precise estimate of cost data to feed into the financial model
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
21
#2 Designing the Technical Requirements
- Performance Requirements & O&M Specifications
The Performance Requirements and O&M Specifications should include:
• A very accurate description of the scope and minimum characteristics of the
services to be delivered by the private sector
• Outputs generated by the delivery of the service in terms of effective
benefits for users and the wider community
• The main responsibilities, related to the service to be delivered, to be
retained in the public sector
• The preliminary requirements for an effective performance evaluation
system that will create adequate and effective incentives during the life of
the contract
• The minimum requirements for an infrastructure maintenance plan
̵ These should not prescribe the means, but should allow space for innovation
• Specific requirements about the service hand-over to government at the end
of contract
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
22
#2 Designing the Technical Requirements - Other
Technical Matters and Preparatory Activities
Technical preparation [and research] should include:
• Identification of the land expropriation required, including mapping of the
areas, identification of owners, and estimation of costs and time needed for
the expropriation
̵ [extra note: provisional site identification and assessment of its availability should usually be done in
identification]
• Field surveys of the project site
̵ E.g. topographical, geotechnical, [hazardous], etc.
• Assessment of potential resettlement issues
• Assessment of linked infrastructure requirements, such as availability of
utility services or connecting roads
• Archeological and/or anthropological surveys to map the potential
archeological and/or anthropological findings, if appropriate
• For linear transport infrastructure, the track or the layout should be
identified and defined, the location of utilities should be mapped, and
relocation needs should be assessed
• Environmental assessment [→developed later]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
23
#3 Consideration of Risk matters
• Risk identification and assessment provides input for:
̵ Constructing the financial base case for feasibility
̵ Value for Money calculations
̵ Initial consideration for risk allocation
• Risk identification must be exhaustive during the Appraisal
Phase
• A comprehensive risk register should be developed
• Risk assessment includes:
̵ Quantitative assessment to develop risk-adjusted costs [→next subtask]
̵ Qualitative assessment for the purpose of preliminary risk allocation
[→explained in “pre-structuring” task later]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
24
#4 Estimating Risk-Adjusted Costs
• Risk-adjusted costs are a central output of the Technical
Requirements design, and feed into the Financial Model
• Typical sets of cost estimates produced at this stage:
̵ Capital costs and their distribution in time
̵ Operational and maintenance costs during the lifetime of the project
• Adjustments for efficiency may be made to recognize private
sector efficiency gains compared to typical public sector costs
̵ But avoid / take care of optimism bias
• Adjustments for risk are made by adding expected risk values
to the baseline costs – the expected risk value is calculated by
multiplying the probability of a certain additional cost occurring
by its financial impact
Expected risk value (expected loss) = probability X potential impact
e.g. 30% of a cost deviation of 10M$ =3 M$
Risk adjusted cost = Base line + risk value/adjustment
e.g. 100 M$ (Baseline) + 3M$ = 103 M$
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
25
#4 Estimating Risk-Adjusted Costs (2)
• Alternative options to calculating expected values:
̵ Consider the most likely cost/scenario and use sensitivities
̵ Probabilistic analysis – Monte Carlo simulations
oUses many iterations to create a distribution function of impacts and resulting
percentiles*
oOnly useful when reliable data is available
• Only project specific risks should be addressed in cost
adjustments
̵ not systemic risks, which should be treated within the equity IRR
• Cost analysis at this stage is from the private-sector’s
perspective (subsequent VFM analysis also considers the value /
estimates of retained risks)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
26
#5 Main outputs and Key Points on Project
Scope, Technical Requirements and Cost
•Assessment
This group of tasks sets up the conditions to be met by the private sector
for the asset and the service to be acceptable
̵ Used to specify the private sector´s obligations, design the instruments to assess
performance and build the mechanisms for effective incentives, through
incorporation in the contract
̵ Remember: avoid over-specification/prescriptiveness
• These tasks provide the baseline assumptions for constructing the base
case that will be used in most feasibility assessments
• As a result of this work, the following is produced:
̵ The construction and design requirements, as well as performance requirements,
to be included in the contract (noting that not all aspects of the design will be
binding / prescriptive)
̵ An assessment of technical risks and estimate of the costs of construction and
related costs adjusted for risk when appropriate (these are the most relevant
inputs to the financial model and therefore the related financial assessments)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
27
Quiz - Project scope definition
4-Which is NOT true regarding the scope definition?
A. Scope definition delineates the boundaries and interfaces between the
public and private sectors
B. Scope definition is intended to determine the precise space or geographical
area in which private partner will deliver the service
C. Scope definition defines the general framework from which to outline the
technical and performance requirements
D. Scope definition provides the context to decide upon the revenue regime
which will form the basis of the financial and risk structure of the PPP
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
28
Quiz - Technical requirements
5-What is NOT true with respect to project design and construction
requirements:
A. They are usually in the form of a functional design or a reference
design, so as to allow the bidder / private party to enjoy a higher
return
B. Providing a functional design or a reference design to bidders is
consistent with a PPP focusing on outputs/services, allowing
flexibility for innovation and efficiency
C. A minimum level of detail is necessary to allow for identification of
the key design requirements that will later be included in the PPP
contract as specifications for construction
D. The Procuring Authority could provide a fully prescriptive design
when it has certainty of the optimal means and methods of meeting
the need
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
29
Quiz - Designing technical requirements
6-What is NOT true regarding the design technical requirements?
A. It is necessary to check applicable regulatory standards and policy
directives like minimum size of a class or safety regulations in roads
B. Detailed Technical Requirements allow bidders to accurately assess
the technical risks and price the service
C. They should state and describe clearly the full design of the
infrastructure as expected and required by the authority
D. While defining technical requirements, costs will be assessed so as to
provide a key input to the commercial feasibility which is to be done
in this phase
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#1 Technical Requirements
30
2
Designing a Preliminary
Structure of the PPP
Guide Sections
#5
31
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
• Financial structure: Revenue Regime and
payment mechanism
• Preliminary Risk Allocation
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#2 Preliminary Structure
32
Designing a Preliminary Structure of the PPP- Intro
• A preliminary structure of the contract must be defined, in terms of
the financial structure (from public perspective – revenue regime,
contract term, co-financing etc.) and risk allocation
• The preliminary structure influences several feasibility exercises:
commercial feasibility, value for money and affordability
• The preliminary structure is refined and further detailed in the
Structuring Phase
Financial
model / base
case &
Commercial
feasibility
Financial structure from the government
perspective
•
•
This is the definition of the means of public
compensation or payments to be granted to the private
partner in the contract and its conditions (…)
It includes:
• Other potential public party participation in the
provision of financing (…)
• The resulting profile of payments in terms of net
present value and yearly public expenditure (…)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
PPP
structure
Affordability
#2 Preliminary Structure
PSC & Value
for Money
33
#1 Financial structure: Revenue Regime and
payment mechanism
• The revenue regime is the source of revenues collected by the project
company:
̵ User-charges (user-pays PPPs)
o Neutral in budgetary terms
o Typical in economic infrastructure (but not always). Examples: toll roads; user-fees in
metro/light rail.
o There should be economic sense for requiring users to pay
o In over-feasible projects there may be payments to the PA – concession fees → see chapter 5.4.8)
–In contrast, in unfeasible projects there is a viability gap – see below
̵ Government service payments (government-pays PPPs)
o Social infrastructure (e.g. hospitals, schools, prisons …)
o Also used in economic some infrastructure projects
–To solve viability gaps
–To remove / retain demand risk
̵ Co-financing and mixed revenue regimes – Two forms:
Mistake in the Guide: The Guide
refers to user-pays PPP when
100% of the revenue comes from
users and government-pays PPP
whe 100% comes from the
budget (rather than “all or the
majority”)
o Grants (co-financing) made [or committed/earned] during the construction phase
o Complementary service payments (hybrid payment mechanism) made over the operational
phase
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#2 Preliminary Structure
34
#2 Financial Structure: Revenue regime and
Payment Mechanism (2)
• A choice needs to be made to define the revenue regime
̵ [If there are identifiable users: should they be charged or not?]
̵ [If charged, should government assign the revenue to the private sector or retain demand
risk?]
• If there are government payments (service payments), the basic characteristics (the
payment mechanism) should be defined in this phase. These include:
̵ Triggers – based on different elements e.g. infrastructure availability, demand or output
̵ The start of payments – usually only once service is operational
̵ The payment profile and timing
o Payments are usually regular during the contract time, but can be designed to meet bankability
requirements
o [timing: quarterly, monthly , …]
̵ Note: service payments may coexist with co-financing
• It is necessary to test commercial feasibility / acceptance and consider other financial
assessment matters before deciding to proceed with the project (these matters
include affordability, impact on public debt, and VfM)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#2 Preliminary Structure
35
#2 Preliminary Risk Allocation
• Risk allocation underlies most of the PPP’s potential advantages
• Define which party will suffer the financial consequences of risk events (and
reflect these changes in values within the business case)
• Details of the risk allocation are developed in Structuring (→ chapter 5) but
Appraisal requires a preliminary allocation, so as to permit
o Risk adjustment of baseline costs
o Estimation of the required return on equity [and financial terms for debt] so as to conduct
commercial feasibility [and consequently estimate payments / fees]
o Adjustment to the Public Sector Comparator
• Risks should be allocated to the party that is “best able to manage” them –
see examples of Guide in box 4.4.
• Mechanisms to allocate risks: (i) revenue / payment mechanism; (ii) specific
contract provisions (compensations and “re-equilibrium”)
• There is no need for a detailed description of contractual instruments at the
Appraisal phase, but a risk allocation matrix should be developed
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#2 Preliminary Structure
36
Quiz - Preliminary structure
7-What is not true with respect to the preliminary structure?
A. The preliminary structure involves preliminarily defining the
structure of the contract in terms of financial structure and risk
allocation
B. The preliminary structure influences commercial feasibility, value for
money and affordability
C. The structure will be refined or further detailed in the Structuring
Phase
D. It allows to the procuring authority to proceed straight forward with
contract drafting once the project receives the green light at the end
of the phase
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#2 Preliminary Structure
37
Quiz - Preliminary structure / Risk Allocation
8-What are true regarding preliminary risk allocation?
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Appraisal requires a preliminary allocation, so as to permit risk adjustment of
baseline costs needed for constructing the financial model, estimate the required
return on equity so as to conduct commercial feasibility and make the needed
adjustment for risk to the Public Sector Comparator for conducting VFM
It aims to define which party will suffer the financial consequences of a risk
eventuating, which means changes in values within the business case
The mechanisms to allocate risks are the revenue / payment mechanism and
specific contract provisions
All are true
Only 1 and 2 are true
Only 2 and 3 are true
Only 1 and 3 are true
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#2 Preliminary Structure
38
3
Developing the Financial
Model
Guide Sections
#6
39
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Developing the
Financial Model
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
• Macroeconomic Assumptions
• Inputting Estimates of Capital Expenditures
• Inputting Operating Costs and Reinvestments
• Financial Structure of the Project Company
• Incorporating revenues
• Accounting Issues
• Defining contract term
• Cash Flow
• Base Case, Sensitivities and Scenarios
Environmental
feasibility
Social feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
40
# Developing the Financial Model - Introduction
• Project needs to be accurately described in financial terms to allow for
financial [and economic] feasibility assessments
Financial Assessment Exercises
Assessment
What is Assessed?
Economic feasibility [this is
All costs and benefits of the project to society
not a financial assessment per se,
but is influenced by the financial
description]
Commercial feasibility
Private sector cash flows for the project under PPP delivery
Fiscal feasibility /
affordability
Public sector cash flows for the project under PPP delivery [and a
measure of the impact on fiscal sustainability]
Impact on government
debt and deficit
Impacts of the project as a PPP under the applicable public sector
accounting regulations
Value for Money
Public sector (or user) cash flows for the project under PPP delivery
in comparison to public sector (or user) cash flows for the project
under traditional delivery
Financial Model: A spreadsheet computer file that incorporates all the private sector’s investments, revenues,
costs and related assumptions so as to produce the “financial base case” of the Project.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
41
# Introduction (2) - Sources of Information
• Sources of information for developing the financial model include:
̵ Financial data from the Cost Benefit Analysis that may be used as the starting point of some
financial values such as estimated potential revenue, total costs, taxes, etc
̵ Costs estimated in the process of defining the technical requirements that provide estimated
values of investment, maintenance, and operations costs
̵ Descriptions of benchmark projects identified in the Technical Feasibility stage and the
respective historic data available
̵ Current data on demand, costs, and revenue of any existing infrastructure
̵ Studies already conducted to assess the need for the project
On the basis of these and new sources including expert judgement, the team
will develop a set of data and assumptions so as to build the financial model
and produce an accurate estimate of the PPP project cash flows. Further
information may be developed for other assessments such as VfM and fiscal
impact
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
42
“Hipótesis” / data sheet
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
43
#1 Macroeconomic Assumptions
• The following macroeconomic assumptions are necessary for developing
long-term estimates:
̵ General inflation
o It is convenient to work in nominal terms (some cost items are not affected by inflation –
such as debt service)
̵ Relative inflation
o price/cost evolution of some cost factors may differ from general inflation
̵ Base interest rates
o the financial market interest rate [the interbank rates] or cost of funding for the lender
̵ Risk-free interest rates: rates of relevant public debt instruments
o These are [sometimes] used to build up investor´s rate of discount for valuing cashflows [→
see section 8]
o Used to calculate and compare government values / payments in NPV (affordability, VFM)
̵ Exchange rates – required when:
o Foreign capital / foreign [cross border] financing is considered
o Some CapEx is in foreign currency [i.e. subject to forex risk]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
44
#2 Inputting Estimates of Capital Expenditures
• Capital expenditure consists of expenses incurred by the private partner until
commissioning, usually including
̵ Construction costs
̵ Design costs
̵ Bidding costs
̵ Project company costs (general costs of the SPV including staff)
̵ Environmental compensation costs
̵ Costs of insurance (premiums) and guarantees
̵ Costs of obtaining licenses and permits
̵ Costs associated with the financing (lender fees and interest during
construction)
̵ Utility relocation and archaeological removals
̵ Expropriation and land acquisition costs
̵ Taxes (including VAT, corporate taxes – which may create a tax shield - and
taxes related to the grant of a concession)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
45
#3 Inputting Operating Costs and Reinvestments
• Operating costs and reinvestments consist of expenses incurred
by the private partner after commissioning, usually including:
̵ Direct project company costs (general costs of SPV)
̵ Ordinary maintenance costs
̵ Major or extraordinary maintenance (reinvestment and renewals) – usually
pre-funded by means of reserves funds
̵ Operation costs
̵ Cost (premia) of insurances and guarantees
̵ Communication costs
̵ Taxes
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
46
#4 Financial Structure of the Project Company
• Where will the money for the initial investment (financing) come from?
̵ A part may come from governments, related to viability gap funding [in user-pays]
and other forms and context of co-financing
o Such as grant financing, revolving cofinancing/co-lending, public equity – this has been
explained in chapter 1 and is further developed in chapter 5
̵ Private financing by the SPV
o Equity (equity shares & shareholders’ subordinated debt)
o Debt (loans, project bonds → see slide “sources”)
• Private finance structure = mix of equity and debt. Parameters/factors
̵ The level of leverage: % of debt assumed to be raised
̵ Debt repayment term
̵ Repayment profile
̵ Cost of debt
• Parameters of the financial structure (in their maximum values) are
imposed by lenders
• [Some are also KPIs used to measure bankability as part of the commercial
feasibility assessment]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
47
#4 Financial Structure of the Project Company (2)
– parameters
The level of leverage:
% of debt assumed to
be raised
• The more debt, the higher the leverage, and the higher the equity
IRR
• [The debt volume depends on Ratios and Term]
• There is an upper limit on the % of debt / minimum % of equity
required by lenders (and sometimes by the PPP contract)
Debt repayment term
• A longer term results in higher accrued interest but lower
repayments [debt service] per year
• [the longer the term the higher the leverage]
Repayment profile
Cost of debt
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
• The repayment profile sets out how much debt is repaid each period
• The profile may consist of flat repayments, constant principal and
interest amortization (and hence decreasing debt service) or a
“sculpted” profile to meet covenants [ratios, DSCR] so as to maximize
debt volume
• Interest rate charged = interest base rate + margin
• The cost of debt also includes fees (structuring, arranging,
availability) and the interest rate hedging cost (implicit in the
form of interest rate swap mechanisms)
#3 Financial model
48
Leverage
𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑒
𝑟𝑟𝑝𝑝 × 𝐸𝐸 + 𝑟𝑟𝑝𝑝 − 𝑟𝑟𝑑𝑑 × 𝐷𝐷
=
𝐸𝐸
100%
-100
11
60%
-60
-60
-40
3
3
8
40,00%
111
60
3
63
48
11,00% project IRR
5% Internal rate
20,00% Equity IRR
Leverage
Leverage is 60:40
1,5 times
1% de decrease in interest rate
/ debt cost equals 1,5%
increase in equity IRR
40
60
20,00
5,00
DEUDA/CAPITAL
*simplification; not counting tax
and accounting effect
TIPO/TIRE
debt
equity
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
49
Debt Service Cover Ratio
• DSCR: number of times that the CFASD contains the debt servic in a certain year
RCSD
DSCR= (Rev-expenses-taxes) / (int.+principal)
20
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
-20
-40
-60
-80
-100
-120
capex
DSCR
70,0%
30,00%
100
ing
O&M
CFADS
2%
30%
-100
1,30
70 debt initial
30 amort
2,0% int
Debt Service
equity CF
-70
Series1
15
4,5
10,5
15,3
4,6
10,7
15,6
4,7
10,9
15,9
4,8
11,1
16,2
4,9
11,4
16,6
5,0
11,6
16,9
5,1
11,8
17,2
5,2
12,1
17,6
5,3
12,3
17,9
5,4
12,5
18,3
5,5
12,8
18,7
5,6
13,1
8,1
8,2
8,4
8,6
8,7
8,9
9,1
9,3
9,5
9,7
9,8
10,0
70
6,7
1,4
63,3
7,0
1,3
56,4
7,3
1,1
49,1
7,6
1,0
41,5
7,9
0,8
33,6
8,2
0,7
25,3
8,6
0,5
16,7
8,9
0,3
7,8
7,8
0,2
0,0
0,0
0,0
0,0
0,0
0,0
0,0
0,0
0,0
8,1
8,2
8,4
8,6
8,7
8,9
9,1
9,3
7,9
0,0
0,0
0,0
2,4
2,5
2,5
2,6
2,6
2,7
2,7
2,8
4,4
12,5
12,8
13,1
Series2
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
50
Leverage & DSCR → Required DSCR
• Compared to a DSCR of 1.4, a DSCR of 1.2 will free cash flow, allowing for an increase
in the volume of debt, therefore an increase in leverage and a higher equity IRR,
which in turn allows the prospective bidder to decrease the revenue requested.
DSCR = 1,4x
• More predictable and stable
cashflows  lower DSCR 
higher leverage.
Income
O&M yearly costs
Debt service
DSCR = 1,2x
Decrease in revenue
requested
Income
O&M yearly costs
Increase in debt
̵ Availability projects – up to 90%
̵ User pays projects in which the
private partner faces demand risk –
down to 60%
• The range slips to 50%-80% in
EMDEs
Debt service
Figure © The World Bank Group, 2015. All rights reserved. Source: https://ppp-certification.com
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
51
Leverage & DSCR → debt term
• More tenor for amortizing debt will
decrease DS so will free more CF
• More capacity to SD so more
capacity to raise debt (for the
same requested DSCR)
• This generates more leverage
/higher equity IRR so more space
to decrease Price offered
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
52
#4 Financial Structure of the Project Company (3)
– sources and instruments of finance
• Sources and instruments of finance include:
̵ Loans by commercial banks/lenders
o[local lenders vs international lenders (cross border)]
̵ Loans provided by the government (or a State-Owned Enterprise)
̵ Project bonds (funded/acquired by institutional investors, retail, lenders…)
̵ Loans from institutional debt providers e.g. pension funds
̵ Multilateral development bank financing
̵ Export credit agency financing
̵ Supplier credits, lease finance, or Islamic finance
The team responsible for the Appraisal need to be aware of the availability
of finance providers and likely conditions
When there is public financial support (grants, loans or even equity) it
should be included in the financial model
See chapter 1 section 7 for more information on sources and instruments of finance
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
53
Quiz - Financial structure of the Project Company
9-Pick the incorrect statement
A. Debt repayment profile may be flat repayment, constant
amortization (and decreasing debt service) and “sculpted” to meet
covenants so as to maximize debt volume
B. There is not a minimum % of equity required by lenders but leverage
is always defined mathematically through the debt service ratios
C. The cost of the debt includes the base interest rate, the margin over
the base rate, bank fees (e.g. structuring, arranging, availability of
finance) and the costs of interest rate hedging
D. To properly develop the financial model, it is important to be aware
of the availability of finance providers and likely conditions
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
54
#5 Incorporating revenues
• Revenues represent the inflows used by the project company to meet its costs
• Government payments are an output of commercial feasibility (also determined by affordability
analysis)
• User charges involve estimation
̵ Estimating user-pays revenues involves estimating demand, estimating elasticity and considering a
reference price [the level of tariff or fare]
̵ Estimating demand is a challenge, especially in greenfield projects and depends on the estimate of price
elasticity (usually through evaluation of willingness to pay)
̵ Defining the reference price:
o The reference price is usually regulated by the public authority (defined or capped)
o The price may be an outcome of the tender process (usually under a cap)
o When there is freedom to establish the tariff or toll (for example, in road projects), the reference price is usually that which
maximizes revenue (subject to the caps). In such cases the procuring authority may set a ceiling on the price that can be
bid
• The potential revenue generated is used to determine the floor for payments to the procuring
authority (the concession fee) or the ceiling for co-financing or any other public payment /
support
• Other revenues (from third-parties or collateral businesses) should also be estimated
The financial model and the construction of the financial base case are not finalized until we
finish the commercial feasibility assessment and:
• in government pays and user pays projects with VGF, we input the right figure for public
payments
• in self-feasible user-pays projects, we decide the tariff or define a payment from the private
partner to the Procuring Authority if there is significant excess revenue.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
55
#6 Accounting Issues
• Free Cash Flow for equity is a financial concept rather than an
accounting concept
̵ [however the accounting treatment influences the cash flows]
• The financial model must project financial statements consistent
with applicable accounting policies, including a yearly income
statement and balance sheet, as:
̵ Project taxes are based on accounting net profit or earnings
̵ The financial statements may be necessary to estimate the project’s impact
on public debt and assess bankability
̵ The financial statements are needed to assess ability of project company to
effectively distribute dividends to its shareholders
̵ Accounting / book values are sometimes used for calculating compensation
under the PPP contract
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
56
#7 Defining the contract term
Issues / factors to be considered in defining the contract term (further developed
in chapter 5)
• Life-cycle management and effective risk transfer
• Private financial structure optimization
• Affordability
• Commercial feasibility (especially in user-pays projects)
• Political pressure
• Budget management
• Rigidity
• Flexibility to accommodate risk and uncertainty
• Relationships with other projects and other contracts
The Contract Term is preliminarily defined in this phase and adjusted during the
commercial feasibility and affordability exercises (especially when there are public
payments/financing) – it will be subject to refinement during structuring
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
57
#8 Cash Flow
• Free cash flow of the project
̵ Represents all revenues less expenses
̵ Is usually negative during the first years of the contract (construction) [defining the
needs for funds]
̵ Pays all operational expenses, taxes and a cash amount is free to service debt [the
“cash available for debt service”] and after that the remainder is potentially
available to be distributed to equity holders through dividends [or as amortization
and interest payments for subordinated debt] if there are no obstacles (subject to
regulatory limitations, requirements for certain reserves, and loan covenants
• Free cash flow of the equity investor
̵ Inflows and outflows of resources from the investors’ (shareholders’) perspective
only
̵ Depicts only the amount of capital expenditure financed by shareholders and
money effectively repaid to investors in the form of dividends or other equity
repayments
Free cash flow and equity investor cash flow calculations are central for calculating
or controlling the value of the key ratios and indicators in the commercial feasibility
exercise
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
58
“Extra”: Free Cash Flow / CFADS
Free Cash Flow would be Ing-O&M-taxes*
Taxes* not considering financial structure (the tax shield) →EBIT * t
This equals (basically) to CFADS. It would defer in the value of taxes to be substracted
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
59
#9 Base Case, Sensitivities and Scenarios (1)
•Base Case: the Financial Model’s most likely/expected
case (based on most likely assumptions) – it is defined
iteratively
̵ [Example: a grant financing of 20% of capex and term of 25 year are
considered initially but the first results may indicate a need to consider a
longer contract term and/or higher co-financing for the project to meet the
commercial feasibility KPI of a minimum equity IRR]
•Uncertainty is inherent to financial modelling and
financial analysis: thus, “sensitivities” are needed to
qualify the results and measure the robustness of the
base case
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
60
#9 Base Case, Sensitivities and Scenarios (2)
• Sensitivity represents a switch in the value of one or more
variables to observe its impact on the Financial Model’s key
performance indicators:
̵ Variations in construction costs
̵ Delays in completion
̵ Eventual peaks in operational costs, in any given year of the contract
̵ Variations in the demand
̵ Fluctuations of revenue due to performance deductions or other changes in
drivers of commercial revenue
̵ Changes in the debt conditions
̵ Specific risks which result in cost overruns or delays
̵ The most relevant macroeconomic assumptions such as exchange rates
• A “Scenario” represents a complete new or different ‘case’ with
new values defined for one or more key variables
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
61
Quantitative analysis (impact) / sensitivities - example
• CapEx deviates / increase by 20%
• Impact in equity IRR
TIR proyecto
TIR accionista
RCSD medio
5,72%
8,04%
1,487
7,96%
13,80%
1,42
Caso base
Impacto desv. capex
20,0
20,0
10,0
10,0
0,0
-10,0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0,0
-10,0
-20,0
-20,0
-30,0
-30,0
-40,0
-40,0
-50,0
-50,0
-60,0
-60,0
Free Cash Flow
incremento
20% coste
-28% variac TIR p
-42% variac TIR Acc
= RCSD
CF accionista
SD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-70,0
Free Cash Flow
CF accionista
SD
• Equity investor has to fund the capex deviation → for the same operational CF equty IRR
decreases 40%
• DSCR not affected
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
62
Quantitative analysis (impact) / sensitivities – example (2)
• Decrease in revenues / increase in O&M= lower CF (e.g. by 20%)
TIR proyecto
TIR accionista
RCSD medio
7,96%
13,80%
1,42
Caso base
Impacto desv. ingreso/CF
20,0
20,0
10,0
10,0
0,0
-10,0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-20% decremento ingreso/CF
-33% variac TIR p
-41% variac TIR Acc
-15% RCSD
5,30%
8,19%
1,208
9
10
11
12
-20,0
13
14
15
0,0
-10,0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-20,0
-30,0
-30,0
-40,0
-40,0
-50,0
-50,0
-60,0
Free Cash Flow
CF accionista
SD
-60,0
Free Cash Flow
CF accionista
SD
• Revenue descrease 20% will contract CF by more tan 30% so effective / projected DSCR (for the
same original financial structure) decreases (getting close to default) and equity IRR suffes by
more tan 40%
• Loss in Equity IRR would be exhacerbated if capital inyection is needed to meet DSCR/debt
amortization
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
63
Quiz - Financial model / miscellaneous
10-Pick the incorrect statement
A. User charges involve estimation but service payments / government
payments are a result/output
B. Potential revenue estimated will be used to determine the floor for
payments to the procuring authority (the concession fee) or the
ceiling for the public payments required if there is a viability gap
C. Estimating demand is a challenge, especially in greenfield projects,
and depends on estimates of price elasticity (usually through
evaluation of willingness to pay)
D. There is no a need for the Financial Model to reflect applicable
accounting policies as the exercise being done is for the use of the
public sector
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
64
Quiz - Financial model / miscellaneous
11-Pick the incorrect statement
A. Free cash flow represents revenues less expenses. After expenses including
taxes we will have the cash available for debt service.
B. The Base Case is the Financial Model’s most likely/expected case (most
likely assumptions) and it is defined iteratively. That means that, for
example, the contract term may be extended or public support may be
increased (or decreased) to meet the targeted value of the equity IRR.
C. Scenarios represent changes in a key variable while a sensitivities represent
a complete set of new values for key variables
D. The contract term is dependant on factors such as affordability and
commercial feasibility
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#3 Financial model
65
4
Assessing the Technical
Feasibility
Guide Sections
#7
66
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
• Relevant Technical Risks Associated with
Infrastructure
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#4 Technical Feasibility
67
Assessing the Technical Feasibility
Technical feasibility is naturally present during the design of the technical
requirements.
However the procuring authority should also conduct specific analysis of technical
feasibility, considering the following criteria
Does the infrastructure design meet the need specified during the Identification Phase?
Are the engineering and architectural requirements achievable and at a price comparable with
similar infrastructure?
Is the proposed technology proven or can the associated risks be properly managed or allocated?
Does the technical description of the project avoid, as far as possible, significant geo-technical
risks? Does it avoid other unbearable technical risks?
Is there a complete assessment of geo-technical conditions that can affect the project, in terms of
costs and time? (Particularly relevant for transport infrastructure)
Is the scope of service viable from a regulatory perspective?
Can the service be specified in terms of outputs and measured adequately though performance
indicators?
Can technological changes in the service delivery be satisfactorily estimated?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#4 Technical Feasibility
68
Relevant Technical Risks Associated with Infrastructure
• Significant technical risks exist in the following circumstances:
̵ Projects with technological complexities, such as novel technology that has
not been significantly tested, or that will adapt technology that is not fully
operational in the same conditions as the project under analysis
̵ Projects requiring difficult engineering innovations, such as complex
transport structures (tunnels or bridges)
̵ Projects built in particularly uncertain geo-technical conditions with
consequences for a major part of the project costs (that is, a tunnel project
or a large sea bridge)
̵ Projects in areas with extraordinary natural risks in terms of weather or
earthquakes
̵ Projects with other complexities and uncertainties concerning the reliability
of costs and time of construction, such as unknown or very old utility
locations
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#4 Technical Feasibility
69
5
Assessing Commercial
Feasibility
Guide Sections
#8
70
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Market sounding
• Assessment criteria - Lenders’ Perspective
• Assessment criteria - Investors’ Perspective
• Assessing Commercial Feasibility in User-Pays
PPPs
• Assessing Commercial Feasibility in
Government-Pays PPPs
• Outputs of the Commercial Feasibility
Assessment
Value for Moneey
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Legal feasibility
#5 Commercial Feasibility
71
# Assessing the Commercial Feasibility – Intro
• A project is considered commercially feasible if: expected revenues (inflows)
under a reasonable scenario are sufficient to cover all expected costs
(outflows) and pay back invested equity with a reasonable return
• In user-pays projects, the focus of the exercise is on:
̵ The project’s capability to raise funds
̵ The capability of free cash flow to service debt and equity
• If the project is “over feasible”, an output of the analysis is the ability of SPV
to pay a concession fee and an estimate of the size of such fee
• If the project is not financially self-sustainable, an output of the analysis is
the size of public resources required to make project commercially feasible
(Viability Gap Funding)
• If there are no user charges, the focus is on directly estimating government
contributions (the price to be paid)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
72
#1 Measuring commercial feasibility. Assessment
criteria - Lenders’ Perspective
• Debt Service Coverage Ratio (DSCR)
̵ Indicates the extent to which a project’s operating profits cover debt service
obligations in each year
̵ Helps potential lenders determine the credit risk associated with the project
̵ A higher DSCR means there is more operating surplus to cover debt, therefore less
risk
̵ Lenders stipulate a “lock-up” value and a “default” value for the DSCR
• Loan Life Coverage Ratio (LLCR)
̵ The Net Present Value of Cash Flows Available for Debt Service (CFADS) divided by
the Outstanding Debt over the loan period
̵ CFADS is only measured up to the maturity of the debt
̵ This ratio provides an estimate of the project’s credit quality from the lenders’
perspective
• Project Life Coverage Ratio (PLCR)
̵ The Net Present Value of the Cash Flows Available for Debt Service (CFADS),
available over the project’s remaining life, to the Outstanding Debt balance in the
period
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
73
#1 Lenders’ Perspective (2)
• Debt Sculpting: shaping the debt repayment profile to optimize the size of debt (read
example in box 4.7.)
120
100
Operating Profit
80
Maximum debt service to a DSCR of 1,4
60
Debt service projected in a constant amortization
system (Debt $360)
40
Debt service projected in a constant amortization
system (Debt $270)
20
120
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
100
80
Operating Profit
60
Maximum debt service to a DSCR of 1,4
Debt service after debt sculping ($360)
40
20
-
1
2
3
4
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
5
6
7
8
9
10
#5 Commercial Feasibility
74
#2 Measuring commercial feasibility. Assessment
criteria - Investors’ Perspective
• The project must be bankable and provide an acceptable return
for the risk [risk/return ratio]
• There are two techniques for assessing the return from an
investor’s perspective:
̵ Net Present Value (NPV), based on discounted cash flow (has to be > 0)
̵ Internal Rate of Return (IRR) of the equity cash flow (has to be > than the
hurdle rate or minimum equity IRR required)
• Investment must provide a return over time that is equal to or
higher than the return on an alternative and comparable
investment
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
75
#2 Investors’ Perspective (2) - Net Present Value
•
NPV = the sum of the equity cash flow values in today’s currency
•
CFt = the net equity cash flow value resulting from each period’s revenues,
expenses, debt service, and other parameters defined in the model
•
i = the discount rate or the cost of capital for equity investors over time
•
t = the number of the period in which the value is being discounted, and
•
n = the total number of periods in the cash flow
The key driver is the rate of discount (cost of equity) → see next slide
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
76
#2 Investors’ Perspective (3) - Required Internal Rate of
Return and estimating hurdle and discount rate
• The IRR is the discount rate that makes the NPV equal zero
• The project’s equity IRR has to be higher than the investor’s required IRR (hurdle
rate)
• Factors affecting the required Internal Rate of Return (or the discount rate)
The
project’s
specific
risks
Guarantee
s by
governme
nt
The return
obtained
for similar
projects
Required
IRR
Systemic
risks for
the
specific
sector
Country
risk
(similar risk)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
77
#2 Investors’ Perspective (4)- Capital Asset
Pricing Model (CAPM)
Ke
Rf
β
Rm
Ke=Rf+βx(Rm-Rf )
• Is the Cost of Equity
• Is the Return on a riskless asset
• The interest rate on relevant public debt (debt issued by the government
and for the closest term possible to the term of the investment)
• Volatility of the [sector of the] analyzed company in relation to
the market
• to adjust the estimated volatility/return of the general market to that of
the representative sector*
• [general] Market return
*Mistake in the Guide (Box 4.8. about CAPM): Rm should be described as the general market return and not
the one for specific sector. β is that representative of the specific sector
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
78
#2 Investors’ Perspective (5) - Other Drivers for
Investors Analysis
•Investors will also consider the following:
̵ Project IRR
oThe project IRR considers the return of the Project Cash Flow, as opposed
to the equity IRRR which considers Equity Cash Flow
̵ Payback period (nominal or discounted)
oThe payback period represents the period required before the
accumulated cash flow equals zero, in either nominal or discounted terms
̵ Absolute size of the investment
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
79
KPIs / indicators
KPIs level
required
KPI value
observed
max debt
term
8,00
8,0
min. DSCR
1,5
1,53
min IRR
15%
16,22%
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
80
#3 Assessing Commercial Feasibility in User-Pays
PPPs
• In user-pays PPPs, the commercial feasibility exercise examines capacity of
the project to generate enough cash resources to meet its expenses
• The exercise considers several scenarios for prices charged to users (if
possible) or a given price (typically when is regulated)
̵ In absence of regulation / cap tariff will be the one that maximizes revenue
̵ [revenue is maximized when the net effect of marginal increase in tariff and
consequent decrease in volume is negative]
• Three possible outcomes:
̵ Project revenue is expected to be sufficient to meet costs
̵ The project is “Over-feasible” - It is expected to generate inflows much higher than
those required to be commercially feasible. The procuring authority can:
o Consider reducing the reference price (if possible)
o Stipulate payments to be made by the private party
̵ Project revenue may not be sufficient
o Options to consider: cancel the project; revise the scope, adjust the technical requirements,
provide government support (viability gap funding – see chapter 1)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
81
#4 Assessing Commercial Feasibility in GovernmentPays PPPs
• In government-pays PPPs, the commercial feasibility exercise
aims to define the amount of government financial support
required to meet investors’ and lenders’ needs [for the defined
pre-structure]
• The analysis produces a direct forecast of revenues to feed the
financial model and a fiscal commitment structure to be tested
in affordability
• Consider the need for satisfying the indicators of commercial
feasibility
̵ e.g. with respect to indexation regimes
̵ [in relation to risk transfer, e.g. considering a portion of availability
payment as fixed or considering bands in volume payment schemes]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
82
#5 Outputs of the Commercial Feasibility
Assessment
• For user-pays PPPs, it provides the following:
̵ An assessment of the capacity of the project to attract investors and
lenders, from a financial perspective
̵ An estimate of the government payments (grant financing or
supplementary service payments) required if the project is not otherwise
feasible
̵ An estimate of the potential payments to the procuring authority if the
project is “over-feasible”, or other parameters to take advantage of the
“over-feasibility” such as a reduction in the contract term or a reduction in
the user charges
̵ Information that can be used to assess a range of financial structuring
matters such as whether potential payments to the procuring authority
should be required up-front or deferred
̵ [a measurement of potential guarantees for minimum revenue/minimum
traffic]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
83
#5 Outputs of the Commercial Feasibility
Assessment (2)
• For government funded PPPs, the feasibility assessment:
̵ Indicates the level of financial support, such as service payments and
grants, required to obtain a commercially attractive and bankable project
̵ Provides information that can be used to assess a range of financial
structuring matters, such as whether the government payments should be
on an availability or volume basis
̵ Note that
oFeasibility must be assessed against a range of sensitivities
oMarket sounding will test the assumptions and conclusions [the structure and
other inputs may be revisited and adjusted following market sounding]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
84
Quiz - Commercial Feasibility
12-Pick the incorrect statement
A. A feasible project is a project whose expected revenues (inflows) under a
reasonable scenario are considered sufficient to cover all costs (outflows)
and pay back invested equity with a reasonable return. That is what is
tested with commercial feasibility
B. When dealing with user-pays projects, we first observe the capability of the
project to raise funds on the basis of the charges to users, i.e. to what
extent the funds needed for financing the project may be repaid with an
adequate return (interest and equity IRR).
C. In a user-pays project, when the charges to users might not be sufficient to
repay the finance needed to meet the CapEx, the project is not feasible and
we may not proceed with it as a PPP
D. In a government pays project, the first objective is to estimate the price to
be paid by the government
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
85
Quiz - Commercial Feasibility / assessment criteria
13-Pick the incorrect statement
A. From a lender´s perspective, the key drivers or KPIs to observe (to assess
whether the project is feasible) are the ratios, like DSCR, LLCR and PLCR,
assuming a certain leverage and cost of debt as an input.
B. The equity IRR to be considered as the target in the exercise should be
defined for the specific project, and will depend on several factors including
the expected nationality of the investor and the expected size of the
company that will invest.
C. The debt repayment profile should be sculpted to maximize the size of debt
(i.e. the leverage), which basically means to sculpt the repayment profile
according to the cash flow so as to meet the level of ratio considered as a
requirement.
D. CAPM is an approach to estimate the equity internal rate of return
expected to be requested by the investors for investing in the project
assessed.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#5 Commercial Feasibility
86
6
Market sounding
Guide Sections
#9
87
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Market sounding
• Key Aspects
• Top 10 Tips for Successful Market Sounding
• Strategic Issues
• Transparency and Governance
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Value for Moneey
#6 Market sounding
88
Market Sounding
• Market sounding during the Appraisal Phase is an early
structured dialogue between the private and public sector
• Market sounding can ensure that the commercial feasibility
captures potential investors’ perspectives, value drivers, and
their main financial and operational constraints
• Many governments encourage a series of soft market tests or
market soundings during the Appraisal Phase
• This helps ensure the project will attract bidders and helps to
communicate the project to the private sector
• The government can obtain valuable feedback that may affect
the financial model, technical requirements and the preliminary
contract structure
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#6 Market sounding
89
Key Aspects
• When should government conduct the market sounding?
̵ Optimum moment: the middle of the Appraisal Phase
onot too soon, as there needs to be clarity on fundamental aspects, and not too
late as there needs to be time to accommodate the market’s feedback
̵ Market sounding can be repeated during the Structuring Phase
• Who to consult (sound out)?
̵ Dialogue with experienced providers, prospective bidders
̵ Lenders
• How should government conduct the market sounding?
̵ Prepare a project information memorandum (Project Note or project
summary)
̵ The government can post the project information memorandum online,
conduct a project open day (“industry meeting”), conduct one-to-one
meetings, run polls or deliver a questionnaire
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#6 Market sounding
90
Key Aspects
• What issues should be sounded?
̵ Test all significantly uncertain aspects of the project. Common points
include:
oThe scope of the project
oThe main technical risks identified that might affect the ability of potential bidders
to deliver the infrastructure and the services
oExpected capital and operational expenditures (CapEx and OpEx)
oThe payment mechanism and other revenue schemes envisaged
oThe general aspects or risk allocation already defined
oFinancial assumptions such as the debt conditions and cost, and the tax and
accounting assumptions
oThe proposed timetable for the period from procurement to the commencement
of services
oThe proposed contract structure, including risk allocation
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#6 Market sounding
91
Top 10 Tips for Successful Market Sounding
1. Ensure that the market sounding exercise is in line with any relevant procurement
rules.
2. Prepare thoroughly for any interface with the market to get the most out of the
exercise, and give the best account of the public authority to the world at large.
3. Consider market sounding exercises at an early stage in the project.
4. Invest time in preparing the background documentation. Be clear about the issues
to be discussed with the market to ensure that the market has something to
respond to. Formulate and word questions carefully, avoiding jargon.
5. Be clear about the process to be used to select organizations to help with the
market sounding exercise, such as selecting organizations to interview or inviting
organizations to make written submissions.
6. Consider the use of a one-on-one format with the selected organizations; be
sensitive to the fact that they might not be at ease with a process that involves
simultaneous discussion with two or more potential competitors, but reassure all
parties that no one is being singled out for special treatment in any subsequent
procurement.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#6 Market sounding
92
Top 10 Tips for Successful Market Sounding
7.
Involve more than one individual on the side of the public authority. Be
consistent about what you say to respondents, and ensure that meetings
are documented; make use of market information and feedback, which is
the ultimate purpose of the market sounding exercise.
8. Do not waste time receiving sales pitches; the point of the exercise is to
find out what the market thinks of the proposal so far. Equally, avoid
being seduced into shaping the project to suit a particular proposal.
9. Do not restrict the scope of the market sounding in any way; aim for a
broad selection of the market such as inviting both operators /
construction-related firms and funders, if appropriate. Keep an open
mind, focusing on outcomes rather than on one particular means of
achieving them.
10. Do not use procurement language such as “bidders” or otherwise give the
impression that the market sounding is a procurement opportunity; this
stage only seeks to gather information and encourage respondents to be
at ease providing critical feedback rather than to feel that they need to be
accommodating as potential bidders.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#6 Market sounding
93
Strategic Issues
• Ensure no confusion about the role of the sounding: companies
are not bidding or providing formal expression of interest
̵ Participation in the market sounding should not offer any advantage in
subsequent procurement process
̵ Do not provide participants with any information that disrupts a level
playing field for future bidders
• Interpreting feedback
̵ Filter the private sector’s recommendations and biases to avoid
manipulation of the project structure
• The sounding team must have expertise, be knowledgeable
about the project, and be respected by the market
̵ Governments commonly use external advisers to help conduct the market
sounding
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#6 Market sounding
94
Transparency and Governance
• Document all the meetings, decisions, and procedures
• Provide access for the public to all documents shared or
produced, including a specific web page where interested
parties may offer their comments and suggestions
(provided that they are previously identified as
professionals or participants in the industry)
• Leave a clear audit trail of all the feedback provided by the
private sector
• Invite audit institutions to participate in the process,
including in the meetings with the private sector
• Consider recording the meetings with individual
companies on video, for the exclusive use of audit
Institutions
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#6 Market sounding
95
Quiz - Market Sounding
14-Pick the incorrect statement
A. Transparency is a factor to consider when designing and conducting a
market test, it being appropiate to provide access for the public to all
documents shared or produced, including a specific web page where
interested parties (industry players) may offer their comments and
suggestions
B. Is important to filter the feedback as this could be biased
C. Companies participating in a market sounding may logically deserve a
special treatment in the bidding process in exchange of their interest
D. Is good practice to consider market sounding exercises at an early stage in
the project, and to consider a procurement appraisal process before
formulating the procurement plan in detail
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#6 Market sounding
96
7
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Guide Sections
#10
97
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
• Refining the Cost-Benefit Analysis
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#7 Economic Feasibility
98
Confirming Economic Feasibility: Refining the
Cost-Benefit Analysis
• Economic feasibility, usually in the form of a cost-benefit
analysis, is conducted in full in this phase, or updated in more
precise terms if it was previously conducted during the
identification phase. In conducting the analysis, the following
should be considered:
̵ The detailed description of the project scope in terms of infrastructure
design and services → this can help to refine the identification of the
service users and other stakeholders whose socio-economic costs and
benefits should be considered
̵ The “willingness to pay” evaluations, eventually done as part of the
estimation of demand, allowing a clearer projection of economic benefits
̵ The technical specifications, providing a much more precise estimate of the
whole-life costs of the project
̵ The risk assessments, providing adjustments to the economic data
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#7 Economic Feasibility
99
8
Fiscal Feasibility
Guide Sections
#11
100
Contents
Objectives and
overview
• Assessing Fiscal Feasibility (Affordability)
• Outputs of the Fiscal Feasibility Analysis
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#8 Fiscal Feasibility
101
Assessing Fiscal Feasibility (Affordability)
• Fiscal feasibility (affordability analysis) examines the government’s ability to
accommodate the project within current and future budget constraints. The
analysis should consider:
̵ Direct liabilities – where the project is fully or partially funded by government
̵ Contingent liabilities – risks retained or allocated to the government
• Three different perspectives can be considered:
̵ Compare the cash flow of commitments to the government’s total projected tax revenues
(using GDP as an approximation)
o Outputs the commitment as a yearly percentage of tax revenues [GDP]
̵ Compare the cash flow of commitments to the procuring authority’s or sector’s projected
budget appropriations
o There is no common specific international threshold
̵ Assess the compliance with eventual overall budgetary limits and constraints
o There may be specific caps (for examples, in terms of percent of GDP) for aggregated exposure of specific
agencies or governments
o Some countries do not include or consider contingent liabilities in such analysis, but only direct liabilities
Note: this chapter refers to exposure in annual / yearly terms but calculations in NPV terms are
also common (stock values versus flow value terms)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#8 Fiscal Feasibility
102
Outputs of the Fiscal Feasibility Analysis
• Fiscal feasibility analysis provides two essential outputs:
̵ First, it estimates the fiscal effect of the project in terms of direct and
contingent exposures on the public budget → This is a central piece of
information on its own for an informed green light decision
̵ Second, it tests the compliance of the project with the regulatory aspects
specific to each jurisdiction that limit PPP expenditures
Fiscal feasibility analysis is highly interrelated with other
assessments, especially commercial feasibility → it may be
necessary to reconsider the structure, scope, and technical
requirements so as to develop a base case that is commercially
feasible and affordable (as well as providing VfM)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#8 Fiscal Feasibility
103
Quiz - Fiscal feasibility (Affordability) [scenario]
15-The procuring authority is assessing a PPP Project based on government service payments
(availability payments), 20 year term.
According to the financial model and the provisional results of the commercial feasibility, the project
requires yearly fiscal direct commitments / direct liabilities (after 3 years of construction) of 50
million US$ per year (in real terms) during 17 years.
We have the following information relevant for the affordability assessment:
• National Guidelines require that
̵ total PPP commitments / liabilities of a particular procuring authority, in flow terms (payments
estimated for each year), can not represent more than 10% of the projected budget of the
respective procuring authority for each year.
̵ There is cap on total PPP fiscal commitments/liabilities of the country in flow terms (total
payments projected/liabilities from all PPPs estimated for each year) equal to 0,5% of GDP on a
yearly basis.
• 50 million represents 2% of the projected budget of the procuring authority in the first year of operations
• The total projected PPP commitments/liabilities of the procuring authority in annual flow terms
(payments estimated for each year related to PPP contracts already in place), including the project
being assessed, would represent 9,75% of the projected budget allocations for the authority per
year for the next 20 years.
• All government PPP commitments (total liabilities) together estimated for the first year of
operations of the project ) represent 0,52% of the national GDP of the current year (the year of
the analysis).
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#8 Fiscal Feasibility
104
Quiz - Fiscal feasibility (Affordability)
16-Considering the description of the previous scenario, Which is true?
A. The Project is in compliance with regulatory limits to PPP exposure because 50
million represents only 2% of the budget of the procuring authority in first year
B. The Project is in compliance because total PPP commitments of the authority (those
related to PPP contracts already in place) will represent, when adding the project, in
year terms, 9.75% of the projected budget appropriations per year
C. The Project is NOT in compliance because all government PPP commitments
together including the project (all payments estimated for each year) represent
0.52% of today´s GDP, which is above the 0.5%
D. We can not conclude whether the project is in compliance because we need to know
the value of contingent liabilities
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#8 Fiscal Feasibility
105
9
Impact on deficit and debt
Guide Sections
#12
106
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Fiscal Feasibility
• Analysis of Impact on Government Deficits and
Debt
• Two Major International Standards
• International Public Sector Accounting Standards
(IPSAS) Number 32
• Eurostat Standards: ESA2010
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#9 Debt Analysis
107
# Analysis of Impact on Government Deficits
and Debt
• Dependent on country’s specific rules and accounting practices
̵ Should the PPP asset be recorded as a public asset in the national
accounts?
̵ Should the related liabilities be recognized and recorded as public debt?
• This analysis influences the green light decision
̵ Country debt restrictions may affect whether the project can proceed
̵ There may be a bias in favor of PPPs to circumvent deficit and/or debt
restrictions
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#9 Debt Analysis
108
# Two Major International Standards
• There are two major international standards that are applied to
PPPs (although some countries have their own variations):
̵ International Public Sector Accounting Standard (IPSAS) 32 or similar
account approaches
oUnder this standard, when the public party controls the asset it will be regarded as
a public asset for accounting purposes with the corresponding recording of public
liabilities
oUsually, all government-pays PPPs and some user-pays PPPs will be consolidated in
the national accounts
̵ European System of Accounts (ESA) 95 / ESA2010 statistical treatment or
similar regulations
oUnder this standard, when the majority of the risks are born by the public partner,
the asset will be regarded as a public asset with the corresponding recording of
public liabilities
oUsually, a user-pays PPP would not be regarded as a public asset (where more
than 50 percent of the revenue comes from users) and a government-pays PPP
may or may not be registered, depending mostly on the risk allocation
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#9 Debt Analysis
109
#1 International Public Sector Accounting Standards
(IPSAS) Number 32
• IPSAS 32 describes service concession agreements as long-term
contracts between a government and a private party whereby:
̵ The operator uses a public asset to provide a public service for a specified
period of time on behalf of the government
̵ The operator is compensated for its services
• This covers both government-pays and user-pays PPP contracts
• IPSAS 32 states that all contracts with the following
characteristics should have consequences for government’s
balance sheet in terms of gross debt
̵ The government controls or regulates what services the operator must
provide with the asset, to whom it must provide them, and at what price
̵ The government also controls any significant residual interest in the asset
at the end of the term of the arrangement
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#9 Debt Analysis
110
#2 Eurostat Standards: ESA2010
• The European System of Integrated Economic Accounts (ESA
2010) provides regulations on how the EU member states
prepare national accounts and produce fiscal information
• The Manual on Government Deficit and Debt provides further
explanation
• There is a clear distinction between user-pays and governmentpays PPPs
̵ User-pays PPPs (referred as “concessions”), where more than 50% of
revenues are user-payments, are generally treated as out of the
government balance sheet
̵ Government-pays PPPs, where more than 50% of revenues come from the
public budget, are assessed based on risk transfer principles – for a project
to be off the government balance sheet, two conditions must be met:
oConstruction risk (most of it) should be transferred AND
oThe majority of the demand risk or availability risk should be transferred.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#9 Debt Analysis
111
#2 Eurostat Standards: ESA2010 (2)
• The contract should transfer the construction risk and either the availability
or volume risk to the private party
̵ This does not imply a full risk allocation, but it is necessary that “most of the risk” is
transferred
̵ There is no precise definition of when the majority of the risk has been transferred
• Situations that generally require classification of the asset in the government
accounts:
̵ Any project where more than 50% of the financing is public finance
̵ Government-pays projects based on volume or availability, where variations in
demand or failures to meet performance requirements do not impose a material
financial impact on the project company and/or where there is a floor limit or a
minimum guaranteed level of payments that cover a substantial part of the financial
package regardless the actual level of demand
̵ Government-pays PPPs in which the PPP project company is public and it is not
constituted as an independent company with its own set of accounts and its own
management materially independent of the government
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#9 Debt Analysis
112
# Additional points
• There is a great deal of divergence across countries in terms of
accounting practice
• There are countries with their own rules that are far from any of
these standards
• There are countries with no regulation regarding accounting
treatment
• The accounting treatment may result in a re-definition of the
project, especially in countries subject to deficit and public debt
constraints
̵ [including revisiting/redefining risk allocation in ESA 2010 countries so as to
meet the risk criteria, which may impact on VFM]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#9 Debt Analysis
113
Quiz - Debt impact
17-There is a government-pays PPP contract for a road, in which government clearly defines the
services to be provided by the private partner and the calculation of the price to be paid to the
private partner. Payments are related to volume of use of the road, and there is a guarantee in the
contract so that a minimum revenue covering 50% of the debt is assured. (If traffic goes below
certain a threshold, the government covers the difference. The threshold is structured so as to cover
approximately 50% of the debt). At the end of the contract period, the asset will revert to the
government for no payment.
Based in the information provided about this PPP project, which is true?
A. According to IPSAS 32 and Eurostat / 2010 guidelines, the asset should be regarded as a public
asset and incorporated in the government´s balance sheet, as the government has clear control
and an interest in the residual value (IPSAS) and because government is guaranteeing 50% of the
debt (ESA 2010)
B. According to either guideline the asset may be treated as off the balance sheet of the
government
C. The asset is to be regarded as a public asset only under IPSAS 32, but it may be validly
considered off balance sheet according to Eurostat / ESA 2010, as risk appears to be sufficiently
transferred according to the Eurostat guidelines
D. The asset should only be regarded as a public asset according to Eurostat, but not according to
IPSAS.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#9 Debt Analysis
114
10
Environmental Feasibility
Guide Sections
#13
115
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Developing the
Financial Model
• Assessing Environmental Feasibility
• The Process of Assessing Environmental
Feasibility
• Outputs of the Environmental Feasibility
Analysis
Environmental
feasibility
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#10 Environmental
116
Assessing Environmental Feasibility
• Environmental impacts of a project:
̵ May be both positive and negative
̵ May arise from construction or operations
̵ May affect more than the immediate project area and may affect other populations
(secondary impacts)
• Environmental impacts and approvals are a common source of delays in PPP
projects
• Mitigation strategies and measures imposed by environmental agencies may
result in a significant cost
• A comprehensive assessment is needed to ensure environmental
considerations are explicitly addressed and incorporated into the green light
decision
• Environmental issues also affect a project’s eligibility for finance
̵ Compliance with the “Equator principles” is a requirement of many lenders and
MDBs, and may be more demanding than national requirements
̵ Some financial institutions may require specific standards
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#10 Environmental
117
The Process of Assessing Environmental Feasibility
• Is there any specific aspect of the project that makes
environmental approvals impossible or the costs to obtain them
prohibitive?
The following 4 steps are necessary to assess environmental
feasibility:
Step #1
•Identify all legal
and regulatory
aspects relevant
for obtaining
environmental
approvals
Step #2
•Thorough due
diligence
(Environmental
Impact
Assessment)
effort to identify,
describe and
quantify the
environmental
impacts on the
project
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Step #3
•Definition of a
strategy to
mitigate the
specific effects
#10 Environmental
Step #4
•Obtain the
environmental
permits and final
approvals
needed for
construction of
the infrastructure
118
The Process of Assessing Environmental Feasibility
• Step #1: Identify all legal and regulatory aspects relevant for obtaining
environmental approvals:
̵ What are the stages for environmental approval?
̵ What is the level of detail required in each of those phases?
̵ What is the content of the environmental assessment needed for the approvals?
̵ What are the sector-specific requirements?
̵ How long will the process take, given the size and sector of the project?
• Step #2: Thorough due diligence (Environmental Impact Assessment) to
identify, describe and quantify the environmental impacts on the project –
typically includes:
̵ A full description of the physical and biological characteristics of the area
̵ Analysis of the project’s impact on the area
̵ Identification of the consequences of construction of the asset in terms of main
inputs (e.g. water usage, energy sources consumed)
̵ Full description of the physical and biological aspects of the area after construction
and operation of the infrastructure
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#10 Environmental
119
The Process of Assessing Environmental Feasibility
• Step #3: Definition of a strategy to mitigate the specific effects:
̵ Focus on the most significant environmental effects
̵ Identify mechanisms to minimize them
̵ Identify measures to compensate for any inevitable environmental
consequences
• Step #4: Obtain the environmental permits and final approvals
needed for construction of the infrastructure:
̵ This is not always possible during the Appraisal Phase
̵ The costs to obtain full studies and file for approvals can be exceptionally
high
̵ It is good practice to obtain environmental permits, at least in a preliminary
or “provisional” mode, before launching the project
̵ At the Appraisal Phase, the government should be able to answer:
o What are the total costs for environmental licensing and future investigations?
o What are the costs of compensation measures?
o What is the estimated time to obtain full environmental licensing?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#10 Environmental
120
Outputs of the Environmental Feasibility Analysis
• The key output of the environmental feasibility analysis: a sound
recommendation about the environmental viability of the project
– can it obtain the necessary approvals, and, if so, at a reasonable
cost?
• The assessment contributes to the sustainability of the initiative by
offering input into the design of the technical requirements,
reducing environmental footprint of the project
• For simpler/smaller projects, the assessment produces a full and
definitive environmental approval
• For larger, more complex projects, the assessment provides a
roadmap for obtaining approval
• [results may influence the financial base case / commercial
feasibility and all other financial assessments as per increase /
variation in the cost of the project]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#10 Environmental
121
11
Social Feasibility
Guide Sections
#14
122
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
• Assessing Social Feasibility
• Scope of Social Impact Analysis (SIA)
• Six Principles of the Social Impact Assessment
(SIA)
• The Process of Analysing Social Impacts
• Outputs of the Social Impact Assessment
Social feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#11 Social Feasibility
123
Assessing Social Feasibility
• Social feasibility analysis examines the project’s impact on the
lives of people that live and work in the project’s area of
influence
• This analysis greatly reduces the overall risks of the project – it
helps to reduce resistance, strengthens general support and
creates better understanding of costs and benefits
• Full analysis can be very expensive and time consuming
̵ It is not justifiable in all projects but
̵ All projects demand a review of project data at the Appraisal Phase to
identify if any material social impacts exist
Social feasibility analysis helps the government to anticipate
adverse effects and avoid, minimize or offset the impacts
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#11 Social Feasibility
124
Scope of Social Impact Analysis (SIA)
• The social impact analysis can address a very broad set of issues. The
issues and their impact depends on the nature, size and location of
the project
• Minimum set of issues to be addressed:
̵ Will the project produce any population or demographic movement?
̵ Will the project significantly alter the economic structure of the local economy or generate any
significant change in relative prices, such as land value?
̵ Will there be a significant change in the general access that the communities have to natural
resources, such as drinking water and energy?
̵ Does the local community have effective governance mechanisms to deal with the long-term
effects of the project?
̵ Will the project increase or decrease the demand for public goods or services, such as
education or health?
̵ Are there groups who will be differentially impacted by the project?
̵ Will the project interfere with the local labor market during or after construction?
̵ Does the background of project staff differ significantly from local communities and provide
potential for misunderstanding and conflict?
̵ Will an influx of newcomers seeking opportunities associated with the project disrupt
traditional social structures and create undesirable effects?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#11 Social Feasibility
125
Six Principles of the Social Impact Assessment (SIA)
1. Achieve extensive understanding of local and regional
populations and settings to be affected by the proposed action,
program, or policy
2. Focus on the key elements of the human environment related
to the proposed action, program, or policy
3. Base the analysis upon sound and replicable scientific research
concepts and methods
4. Provide quality information for use in decision-making
5. Ensure that any environmental justice issues are fully described
and analyzed – identify the disadvantage and minority
populations
6. Undertake project, program, or policy monitoring and
evaluation, and propose mitigation measures if needed
Source: Principles and Guidelines for Social Impact Assessment in the USA, The Inter-organizational Committee
on Principles and Guidelines for Social Impact Assessment. (2003)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#11 Social Feasibility
126
The Process of Analysing Social Impacts
• Sometimes integrated with the Environmental Impact
Assessment, the Social Impact Assessment typically includes 4
steps:
Step #1
• Thorough
identification
of the people
residing
and/or
working within
a project’s
area of
influence
Step #2
• Establish a
social baseline
that indicates
the status of
the issues to
be considered
before the
implementatio
n of the
project
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Step #3
• Estimate the
impacts of the
project in the
communities
identified
within the area
of influence
#11 Social Feasibility
Step #4
• Identification
of the
mitigation
strategies for
the adverse
impacts
identified in
previous steps
127
The Process of Analysing Social Impacts
• Step #1: Thorough identification of the people residing and/or
working within a project’s area of influence:
̵ A mapping of the communities and their social, economic, and cultural
connection with the site in which the project will be implemented
̵ Includes the listing of the social issues to be considered (at least the
“minimum set of issues” described before)
• Step #2: Establish a social baseline that indicates the status of
the issues to be considered before the implementation of the
project → issues identified should be incorporated in a social
description of the communities affected
̵ Methods of obtaining data for social baseline include (see PPP Guide Box 4.12)
Secondary data
Public consultation
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Participatory
techniques and
stakeholder
analysis
Qualitative
methods
#11 Social Feasibility
Quantitative
methods
128
The Process of Analysing Social Impacts
• Step #3: Estimate the impacts of the project in the communities
identified within the area of influence:
̵ Project the existing baseline into the future with and without the PPP
project
̵ Compare and assess how the issues that were identified as relevant for the
specific project evolve against the original baseline
̵ Classify impacts in terms of their relative importance, considering the
number of people affected and the reach of the damage produced
̵ Order, or prioritize, the impacts in terms of their relative social significance
̵ Note: some impacts require careful investigation: e.g. Land expropriation
and forced relocation, especially indigenous communities
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#11 Social Feasibility
129
The Process of Analysing Social Impacts
• Step #4: Identification of the mitigation strategies for the
adverse impacts identified in previous steps: Developing a social
action plan and a basic estimation of costs and schedule
̵ Sequence the strategy of social actions as suggested by IFC´s good practice
note:
oFirst, give priority to impact avoidance.
–Social impacts can often be avoided by ‘at source’ changes, such as the selection of an
alternative site for the project or the modification of the design
oSecond, focus on the reduction or minimization of impacts that cannot be
avoided.
–The reduction of impacts is achieved through the implementation of customized measures,
such as soundproofing houses within the noise footprint of an airport, regulation of
construction traffic, etc.
oThird, where adverse impacts are unavoidable, people affected by the project
must receive adequate compensation
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#11 Social Feasibility
130
Outputs of the Social Impact Assessment
• Social Impact Assessment should identify the impacts of the project in the
community and classify them in terms of significance
̵ Note that resulting consultations play an important role in creating legitimacy of the
project among the communities in which it directly engages
• Social Impact Assessment should provide recommended actions that can
avoid, minimize, or compensate for adverse social impacts of the project.
Mitigation actions
̵ may be developed during appraisal [or before launching] – like changes in technical
requirements, project design, etc. and revised cost estimates for input to the
financial model
̵ may be taken by the private sector [requested by government through the PPP
contract] → government should estimate the cost and input it in the financial model
• The assessment should indicate the total adverse social consequences that
can not be mitigated → for consideration in the green light decision
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#11 Social Feasibility
131
12
Legal Feasibility
Guide Sections
#15
132
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
• Assessing Legal Feasibility
• The Process of Analyzing Legal Feasibility
• Outputs of the Legal Feasibility and Conducting
Legal Due Diligence
Legal feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#12 Legal Feasibility
133
Assessing Legal Feasibility
• Detailed legal due diligence is necessary to ensure all
foreseeable legal requirements are met
• Legal feasibility assessment aims to:
̵ Ensure that the project is legally doable
̵ Facilitate risk management, identifying legal obstacles for developing the
project
• Some limits or restrictions might require changes in law or
regulations
• Steps:
̵ Step #1: Analysis of the applicable legal framework
̵ Step #2: Assessment of the legal readiness of the procuring authority
̵ Step #3: In-depth legal analysis of the main project issues
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#12 Legal Feasibility
134
The Process of Analysing Legal Feasibility
• Step #1: Analysis of the applicable legal framework, including
̵ The enabling PPP legislation (if any), especially looking for particular requirements
imposed on projects such as a minimum capital value and maximum contract
duration
̵ The public procurement law which may be partially applicable, especially in a
search of general contractual and procurement guidelines
̵ Legislation referring to foreign investment, property, and labor issues
̵ Legislation related to land use planning and environmental laws
̵ Sector specific legislation
̵ Legal aspects of dispute resolution and intellectual property
̵ Legislation relating to the granting of ownership/control of public assets or of
responsibility for the delivery of public services to third parties
̵ Legal treatment of revenue sources associated with the concession [e.g. restrictions
on the private partner’s right to charge end users]
These reviews will provide a list of requirements that feed other feasibility
exercises such as the technical requirements and commercial feasibility
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#12 Legal Feasibility
135
The Process of Analysing Legal Feasibility
• Step #2: Assessment of the legal readiness of the procuring
authority
̵ Does the promoting authority and other institutions involved have the legal
authority to launch the project?
̵ Do they have the legal authority to proceed with the approval? Who has
formal responsibility for the appraisal exercises? Which authorities and
government bodies should be involved in approvals and to what extent?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#12 Legal Feasibility
136
The Process of Analysing Legal Feasibility
• Step #3: In-depth legal analysis of the main project issues
̵ The financial aspects of the project
o Legal feasibility of public support
o Limitations on charging users
̵ Issues considered relevant to commercial viability, including the bankability
of the project
o Legal feasibility of step in rights and security packages
̵ Land and property assets issues
o Use of land and land availability – in some countries there is a need for a legal change
between “public use” to “disposable use”; sometimes legal authorization to transfer the
control of the asset to private is required [typically embedded into the contract title]
o Potential alternative ownership claims on the land and rights of other users (e.g. oil
company, electricity transmission)
o Responsibility for relocating people
̵ Foreign investment and currency exchange
o Restrictions on FDI, repatriation of capital, foreign staff etc
̵ Employment issues
o As for public sector employees
̵ Tax and accounting issues considered in the financial model
o Including import duties, tax exemptions etc.
̵ Environmental issues – what clearances are requested?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#12 Legal Feasibility
137
Outputs of the Legal Feasibility and Conducting Legal Due
Diligence
• The key output of the legal feasibility assessment is a detailed
recommendation for the approval of the project based upon:
̵ The existence of no significant legal obstacles for the future development
of the project, or
̵ If any obstacle exists, the strategy to be followed to overcome it as well as
the estimation of time and resources necessary to do it
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#12 Legal Feasibility
138
13
Value for Money
Guide Sections
#16
139
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Market sounding
• Value for Money Assessment – purpose and
timing
• VfM methods- Quantitative Value for Money
Analysis
• VfM methods- Qualitative Value for Money
Analysis
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Value for Moneey
#13 Value for Money
140
#1 Value for Money Assessment – purpose and timing
• Compares the relative merits of PPP procurement against one or more other
procurement routes, usually traditional public finance (represented by the
Public Sector Comparator (PSC))
̵ Does the PPP option provide higher net economic benefits / incremental efficiency?
• For some countries, this is not a required assessment or may be skipped if
there is no alternative
̵ This reinforces the need for meaningful economic analysis (taking care to avoid PPP bias)
• The assessment can incorporate both quantitative analysis and qualitative
analysis, addressing issues not quantifiable
• Timing (see next slide)
̵ The assessment is typically done in appraisal but revisited if necessary in structuring / before
launching
̵ It is also convenient to check VfM following the tender process on the basis of the winning bid
/ contract signed*
̵ A value for money assessment should be run again for material contract changes (especially
changes affecting the risk allocation)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#13 Value for Money
141
#1 VfM purpose and timing (2) - alongside the
PPP Process
Phase
Scope (source of data)
Purpose
Appraisal
VfM using available data
Indicative for the green light
decision
Structuring
VfM may be revisited if
necessary (e.g. following a
material change in the contract
structure)
Decision to issue Request
for Proposal
Following
contract award
Full VfM, considering the final
contract after procurement
Feedback for future projects
Contract
management
Full VfM, considering contract
Guidelines for conducting
enhancements and reviewed risk negotiation with the private
allocation
sector
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#13 Value for Money
142
#2 VfM methods- Quantitative
• Depending on the country, the analysis may be quantitative,
qualitative or both
• Quantitative analysis usually involves 6 steps
Step 1 – Produce a raw Public Sector Comparator (PSC)
Step 2 – Turn the raw PSC into an adjusted PSC to permit a fair comparison
Step 3 – Estimate the costs of the PPP project
Step 4 – Achieve a comparable value from these two cost structures with different time
profiles
Step 5 – Indicate which option represents the best alternative to implement the project
Step 6 – Test the robustness of the VfM exercise with a sensitivity analysis
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#13 Value for Money
143
#2 Quantitative Value for Money Analysis (2)
• Step 1 – Produce a raw Public Sector Comparator (PSC)
̵ Document the costs and revenues, from the base case in the commercial
feasibility, in a spreadsheet
̵ All efficiency gains generated by the private sector involvement are
excluded at this point because the PSC reflects direct delivery by the
government
̵ The PSC reflects the net fiscal impact of the project (costs less revenues),
therefore all non-fiscal [non-tax] revenues considered in the PPP option
should be included in the PSC calculations
̵ If the revenues generated by a traditionally procured project are different,
the values in the PSC calculations should reflect this adjustment
–For example because the tariff to be charged to users will be lower
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#13 Value for Money
144
#2 Quantitative Value for Money Analysis (3)
• Step 2 – Turn the raw PSC into an adjusted PSC to permit a fair
comparison
̵ Change costs to incorporate value of risks that the government retains in a
traditional procurement but that are transferred in PPP project estimates –
(unless value of retrained risks in PPP are added in PPP project)
̵ Allow for differences in social and economic benefits
–[An adjustment for potential loss in benefits could make sense (e.g. if most likely
construction term includes a certain delay, value of the benefit missed or delayed should be
included as adjustment]
̵ Neutralize cost differences which do not reflect true efficiency differences
(e.g. tax effect) → neutrality adjustment
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#13 Value for Money
145
#2 Quantitative Value for Money Analysis (4)
• Step 3 – Estimate the costs of the PPP project:
̵ Using data from the commercial feasibility assessment and affordability
exercise
̵ Estimate cost for the government, regardless of user payments
̵ Governmental payments can assume different triggers and profiles, but a
common payment structure produces constant availability payments
throughout the contract, once the project is operational
̵ Include costs of project contract management and transaction
implementation (extra cost oversight, named sometimes “regulatory
costs”)
̵ Consider other types of public financial support that may only be possible
through the PPP alternative, and might represent an indirect cost to
taxpayers
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#13 Value for Money
146
#2 Quantitative Value for Money Analysis (5)
• Step 4 – Achieve a comparable value from two cost structures
with different time profiles:
̵ Compare the Net Present Value of each alternative, applying a discount
rate to the projected alternative costs
̵ The discount rate directly affects the conclusion of the VfM assessment
̵ Common approaches to the discount rate:
oUse of the opportunity cost of government funds for both the PPP and the PSC
cost structure
oUse of a particular rate for each project corresponding to the degree of project
risk
oUse of the social time preference rate as the standard real discount rate for both
the PPP and the PSC
o Note that the approach for calculating the rate of discount should we defined in advance and
embedded in the framework
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#13 Value for Money
147
#2 Quantitative Value for Money Analysis (6)
• Step 5 – Indicate which option represents the best alternative to
implement the project:
̵ The PPP is said to offer a better Value for Money when the costs are lower
than the PSC
̵ The calculation formula is:
•
•
•
•
•
VfM = Value for Money
YCt = Yearly cost of the PPP
scheme in year t (for instance,
availability payments)
ARCt = Adjustment for regulatory
costs [contract oversight]
r = Discount rate
CCt = Construction costs of the
PSC in year t
Note: the formula in the Guide is wrong:
It is the other way around
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
•
•
•
•
•
OMt = Operation and maintenance
costs of the PSC in year t
RRt = Renewal and replacement costs
of the PSC in year t
ARt (ACO)= Adjustments for risk in
year t (adjustments for costs
overrun)
ACNt = Adjustments for competitive
neutrality in year t
ASEt =Adjustments for differences in
socio-economic consequences of the
project in year t
#13 Value for Money
148
#2 Quantitative Value for Money Analysis (7)
• Step 6 – Test the robustness of the VfM exercise with a
sensitivity analysis:
̵ Quantitative VfM assessment is based on unproven assumptions
̵ Sensitivity analysis test the assumptions related to PSC cost projections,
cost overruns, income generated, the discount rate used in the NPV
calculations, and so on
̵ The conclusions should be read for reference only
oA positive Value for Money does not necessarily imply that a PPP route should be
used; qualitative factors should be considered in the decision as well
oA negative Value for Money does not mean that a PPP route is worse than
traditional procurement. Sensitivities of important inputs should be developed in
order to test the robustness of the results
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#13 Value for Money
149
#3 Qualitative Value for Money Analysis
•
•
This involves checking whether the general concept of the project fits
the model of private sector investment
Non-financial benefits of PPPs should be taken into account (EPEC)
• Accelerated delivery
• Enhanced delivery
• Wider social impacts
•
•
Non-financial benefits must not be ‘double counted’ if they have
already been incorporated in the adjustments of the PSC
Identify problems associated with involving a private sector player into
the specific PPP contract, followed by proposed strategies to mitigate
them
• e.g. PPPs can result in a lack of policy flexibility, or specific potential
difficulties in monitoring
•
Inevitably, this analysis is subjective → view it alongside quantitative
analysis
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#13 Value for Money
150
#3 Qualitative Value for Money Analysis (2)
•
Different countries use different criteria
•
United Kingdom (UK) Treasury defines:
Suitability criteria:
Unsuitability criteria:
• Long-term, predictable need for service
• Ability to allocate risk effectively
• Likely ability of private party to manage
risk and take responsibility for delivery
• Presence of stable and adequate policy
and institutions
• Competitive bidding market
•
•
•
•
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Project too small or complicated
Sectors needs are likely to change
Risk of obsolescence
Contracting authority is inadequately
skilled to manage a PPP
#13 Value for Money
151
VFM exercise
Calculate the VFM
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
xxxx
Financial Costs
xxxx
Risk
premia/contingencies
xxxx
Base costs
(net of taxes to PPP
and comercial
revenues)
Socio Ec. adjustments
xxxx
Competitive neutrality adj.
xxxx
Adjustments for risk
xxxxx
Base costs net of user
revenues
Base Case costs
(capex+opex) in PPP
financial model
•Step 1 – Produce a raw Public Sector
Comparator (PSC)
•Base Case PPP costs in NPV are
$65M, but includes $10M of
contingencies and $5M for user
revenues
•Step 2 – Turn the raw PSC into an adjusted
PSC to permit a fair comparison
•Value / estimate of risks transferred
to private in PPP (and retained in
PSC) is $30 M .
•Extra Taxes in PPP are NPV=$5M
•Cost benefit: most likely delay in
PSC is 6 months (each month value
is $0.5 M)
•Step 3 – Estimate the costs of the PPP
project
•Is the NPV of net payments (net of
user revenues) and net of taxes
•For more detailed information,
financial costs are $15M
•Step 4 – Achieve a comparable value from
these two cost structures with different time
profiles
•Is calculating NPV of the two
payment streams
•[Step 5 – Indicate which option represents
the best alternative to implement the project]
•[Step 6 – Test the robustness of the VfM
exercise with a sensitivity analysis]
13
VFM
xxxx
PPP net costs
*comercial revenues are
considered to be
transferred(assigned
xxxxx
Total NPV
Total NPV
PSC
PPP
#13 Value for Money
152
VFM exercise
Traditional Delivery
Socio Economic adjustments
Competitive neutrality
Adjustments for risk
Base Costs (net of revenue)
TOTAL
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
$3 M
$5 M
$30 M
$50 M
$88 M
PPP
Financial costs
Risk premia/contingencies
Base Costs (net of revenue)
TOTAL
$15 M
$10 M
$50 M
$75 M
VfM
$13 M
#13 Value for Money
153
14
Procurement Strategy and
tender process types
Guide Sections
#17
154
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
• The Procurement Strategy
• Main Procurement / Tender process types
• Extra: Processes in sequence
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
#14 Procurement Strategy
155
The Procurement Strategy
• The procurement strategy determines how the private sector
partner will be selected
• Focus on obtaining the best Value for Money
• Create incentives for all players involved
• The details will be designed in Structuring Phase
• Issues to be dealt with during Appraisal:
̵ Approach to qualifications
oWhen to issue the request for qualifications (in advance of, or same time as, the
RFP)
oWhether to pre-select (short list) bidders or only apply pass/fail criteria
̵ Approach to Request for Proposals
oTiming of the finalization and issue of the RFP and contract
̵ Approach to bid submittal and evaluation
oAre negotiations or iterative proposals allowed?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#14 Procurement Strategy
156
Main Procurement / Tender process types
Open tender or onestage process
Open tender with
pass/fail prequalification (or twostage open tender)
Negotiated process
(short listing with
negotiations)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Restricted procedure
(shortlisting with
one bid)
Dialogue or
interaction process
#14 Procurement Strategy
157
Main procurement/tender process types
Type
Open tender or
one-stage tender
process
Features / description
Country examples
•
Spain, most countries in
Latin America.
•
RFP is published at the same time as the contract, and
launching implies the invitation to propose, with the
tender open for bidding to any potential bidder.
The proposal requirements also include the
qualification requirements
quite common in EU vis a
vis competitive dialogue.
Open tender with •
pass/fail prequalification (or •
two-stages open
tender)
Separating call for qualifications (RFQ) and call for bids Some countries in Latin
America for some projects
or invitation to propose (RFP issuance).
There is an initial stage in which potential bidders are (México, India, Colombia).
•
Restricted
procedure
(shortlisting with
one bid)
As with Open tender with pre-qualification, there is an
initial stage in which potential bidders are invited to
submit qualifications. Qualifying bidders are ranked
and a limited number of the highest ranking are shortlisted.
•
This short-list of bidders will be invited to submit their
bids
•
invited to pre-qualify (under an open basis), before
the issuance of the RFP and contract
Issuance of the RFP implies invitation to propose and
there is only one round of bidding
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Considered an option
under EU regulations, but
less commonly used than
the former types.
#14 Procurement Strategy
158
Main procurement/tender process types (2)
Type
Negotiated
process
(shortlisting
with
negotiations,
or BAFO)
Dialogue
process
Interaction
process
Features / description
Based on a previous short listing, bidders are invited to
submit their bids and negotiations are open with all of the
shortlisted bidders or with a limited number of candidates.
Bids are usually iterative before calling for the final offer. In
BAFO process stage bids are evaluated as to narrow the
number of bidders. Two selected candidates will submit
Best-and-Final Offer - BAFO)
Short-listing is accompanied by a dialogue period as to
define (or refine) RFP and specially contract
In the strict sense, only one final bid is submitted. Some
processes will consider consecutive bids, usually nonbinding.
Country examples
Considered
in
EU
by
legislation.
More marginal method of
procurement in EU, although
significant tradition in EU.
Regulated option by EU
legislation, for specific type of
projects
meeting
some
features, mainly related to
complexity.
Used in some states in USA.
An option regulated by
legislation in Egypt.
Whereas the EU’s process focusses on dialogue in relation The standard approach in
to defining the final terms of the RFP and the contract, Australia and New Zealand.
interaction process focusses on the development of the
bidders’ proposals and their interpretation of the RFP.
Usual to be a final negotiation phase (with one or more
bidders) after the initial evaluation of bids
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#14 Procurement Strategy
159
Extra: Processes in sequence
Open tender with prequalification
Structuring
and drafting
RFQ
Pre-tender:
Issuance of
RFQ
Contract
structure and
drafting
Qualification
period
Structuring
and drafting
RFP
SoQ assessment and
Prequalified candidates (or
assessment and selection in
short list process))
Approving
contract
and tender
package
Tender
issuance:
invitations to
propose under
RFP+contract
Bid submission
period
Bid
evaluation
Open tender – one stage
Contract
structure and
drafting
Structuring and
drafting RFQ &
RFP
Approving
contract and
tender
package
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Tender issuance:
invitations to
propose under
full package of
docs
Bid submission
period
#14 Procurement Strategy
SoQ
assessment +
Bid
evaluation
160
Extra: Processes in sequence (2)
Dialogue or interactive process – EU Competitive Dialogue
Structuring &
drafting RFQ
(for
shortlisting)
Pre-tender:
Issuance of
RFQ
Contract
structure
Qualification
period
Structuring and
drafting RFP &
drafting contract
SoQ
assessment
and selection
(short list)
Issuance of
invitations to
dialogue or
negotiate
Preapproving
contract
Dialogue period
(negotiating final contract
terms)
Approving
final
contract and
final tender
package
Bid preparation
Tender:
invitations to
propose: only
RFP+contract
Bid submission
period
Bid
evaluatio
n
Dialogue or interactive process – Australian / New Zealand Interactive Tender Process
Structuring &
drafting RFQ
(for
shortlisting)
Pre-tender:
Issuance of
RFQ
Contract
structure
SoQ
assessment
and selection
(short list)
Qualification
period
Structuring and
drafting RFP &
drafting contract
Approving
contract
and tender
package
Tender
issuance:
invitations to
propose under
RFP+contract
Bid preparation
Bid submission
period
Bid
evaluatio
n
Interactive tender process
(ensuring bids respond to RFP requirements)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#14 Procurement Strategy
161
Quiz - Tender processes
18-Pick the incorrect statement
A. A process with a separated call for qualifications (RFQ) and call for bids (RFP issuance), in which
potential bidders are invited to pre-qualify before the issuance of the RFP and contract, and
those that prequalified are invited to submit only one bid represents an one-stage open tender
process.
B. A process in which there is:
i.
a separate call for qualifications (RFQ), in which potential bidders are invited to submit qualifications so as
to be selected on a short list
ii. An invitation to shortlisted bidders to submit their bids and negotiations with all of the shortlisted bidders
or with a limited number of candidates
iii. Iterative bids so as to narrow the number of bidders
iv. Selection of two candidates to submit their final offer is negotiated process with BAFO.
C. A process with a short-listing followed by a dialogue period so as to refine the RFP and
especially the contract. At the end of the dialogue, the procuring authority calls for bids. This is
competitive dialogue.
D. A process in which an RFP is published at the same time as the contract, and the tender launch
constitutes an invitation open to any potential bidder, to submit proposal, at the same time as
requesting qualifications, a one-stage open tender process.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#14 Procurement Strategy
162
15
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and checking
Guide Sections
#18, #19, #20,
#21, #22
163
Contents
Objectives and
overview
Fiscal Feasibility
Detailing scope,
designing technical
requirements and
assessing costs
Impact on deficit and
Debt
Designing a
Preliminary Structure
of the PPP
Environmental
feasibility
Developing the
Financial Model
Social feasibility
Assessing the
Technical Feasibility
Legal feasibility
Assessing
Commercial
Feasibility
Value for Moneey
Market sounding
Confirming Economic
Feasibility
• Formal Requirements for the Appraisal of PPPs
• Planning Ahead - Update and/or expand the
project management plan
• Appraisal Report
• Obtaining the Final Approvals
• Getting Ready: Appraisal Phase Check List
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
Procurement Strategy
and tender process
types
Planning, Reporting,
Approving and
checking
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
164
# Formal Requirements for the Appraisal of PPPs
• Government’s decision drivers for procuring are often translated
into national PPP frameworks
• Policy guidelines (binding or indicative) help to diminish failure
risks and gain time, efficiency and reliability in the PPP process
• In this sense, many countries have formal requirements to
demonstrate proper appraisal before committing resources to
structuring the PPP deal
• Appraisal exercises need to be adapted accordingly
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
165
#1 Planning Ahead - Update and/or expand the
project management plan
• A Management Plan has been designed at the end of
Identification & Screening, and now it should be revisited
Update time
schedule
Review resources
available
Enlist government
support and
identify
responsibilities
Other stakeholder
identification and
communication
strategy
• #1 Update the time schedule
̵ Check project schedule for inconsistencies
̵ Information provided during appraisal contributes to a more precise and
realistic schedule (e.g. timing for environmental approvals)
oIncluding all foreseeable stages of the procurement process
̵ Avoid optimism bias
̵ The time schedule is a driver for the green light decision, which marks the
end of the Appraisal Phase
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
166
#1 Planning Ahead (2)
• #2 Review the resources available
• The Structuring Phase demands a highly experienced team working in a
multidisciplinary context with a large and complex infrastructure project
• It is fundamental to identify the expertise and resources needed from
within and outside government
• Legal, technical, environmental, financial
• Even in most experienced governmental teams engage transaction advisers
and industry experts. Preparation for hiring experienced advisors should
begin as early as possible
• If resources from the Appraisal Phase are to be used in Structuring Phase,
governance mechanisms should be in place to avoid optimistic bias/lack of
objectivity
• The project team must be fully engaged at the inception of the Structuring
Phase
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
167
#1 Planning Ahead (3)
• #3 Enlist government support and identify responsibilities
̵ Clarify roles (including quality assurance, auditing and so on) if these are not yet
defined
̵ Specify the decision-making roles including approvals of final drafts
̵ When institutional requirements are defined at the framework level, be sure of
enlist support of the relevant agencies
̵ When there is no final list of approving bodies, develop a specific governance
framework
o Incorporate the main stakeholders
o Develop a clear governance framework
o Including if possible a formal guideline of who decides what
• #4 Other stakeholder identification and communication strategy
̵ Update the stakeholder mapping – the stakeholder environment may have changed
̵ Define communication strategies that indicate the types of audiences targeted and
the channels to be used in order to establish and maintain relationships
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
168
#2 Appraisal Report
The Appraisal Report must present assumptions, discussions
and conclusions.
Typical contents:
• Executive summary of conclusions
• Need and options analysis, policy
objective and general considerations
• Governance considerations
• Technical requirements
• Commercial feasibility analysis
• Market sounding conclusions
• Economic analysis
• Affordability
• Impact on gross debt
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
• Environmental assessments and
planned impact mitigations
• Social feasibility analysis
• Legal due diligence
• Value for Money assessment
• Procurement strategy
• Legal and regulatory requirements
• Project plan and recommended next
steps
• Conclusion
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
169
#2 Appraisal Report (2)
• The Appraisal Report should:
̵ Be evidence-based
̵ Reflect all the work conducted during Appraisal Phase
• High levels of technical data are not necessary nor should there
be technical jargon in main body
• Important technical data should be included in appendices
• The report should be written in a style that provides clear,
objective and direct recommendations for the decision-making
authority
• The report is the main tool for allowing the project to move to
the next phase of preparation
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
170
#3 Obtaining the Final Approvals
• The appraisal report should
recommend one of the following
four decisions to be made by the
governmental body charged with
making the final green light decision
• Usually more than one public body
is involved in approval
• Some bodies or agencies may
focuses on specific appraisal
exercises or reports
• The following bodies are typically
involved
̵ Ministry of Finance / Treasury
̵ Ministry of Economy / Development /
Planning agency
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
The project
should be
procured as a
PPP
4 posible
outcomes for
the decision
at the end of
Appraisal
The project creates
economic value but
should not be
procured as a PPP
(a traditional
procurement route
could be assessed)
More
information is
required to make
an effective
recommendation
The project
should not be
procured at all
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
171
#4 Getting Ready: Appraisal Phase Check List
Points to be fully addressed at the end of the Appraisal Phase:
The technical requirements are described, in terms of infrastructure design
and service specification, to the level of detail needed to accurately estimate
Capex and Opex
The relevant technical risks, including geo-technical risks, are clearly
identified and thoroughly analyzed
The project is considered technically feasible, considering the technological
assumptions and any outstanding risks associated with the technical
requirements of the projects
A financial model is functional, allowing for sensitivity analysis of the main
technical and financial assumptions
A base case is described by the financial model, and the free cash flow for
equity is clearly estimated
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
172
#4 Appraisal Phase Check List (2)
The project is considered commercially feasible, in the sense that it meets
the financial criteria of an appropriate project and equity cash flow
A preliminary structure of the project is designed indicating a proposed risk
allocation and payment mechanism
The project has been submitted to the relevant market players through a
structured sounding exercise, and all the issues identified were dealt with
The updated financial data has been put into the Cost-Benefit Analysis, and
the project is considered to produce positive net benefits to society
The eventual financial support to be provided by the government is
considered affordable (from the perspective of budgetary appropriations and
public financial management)
The impact of the project on the government balance sheet can be
accommodated
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
173
#4 Appraisal Phase Check List (3)
No outstanding environmental risk has been identified and/or such risks
have been dealt with
The final environmental permit is obtained or the process of obtaining it is
clearly mapped out
The social impacts of the project are assessed and mitigation strategies are
designed and priced
A thorough legal due diligence has identified all the relevant legal issues
regarding the project and the requirements of the decision-making process
The Value for Money analysis indicates, as far as possible, that the project,
procured through a PPP, can be efficiently delivered
All the regulatory directives of the particular country that must be met for a
final approval to procure a project have been considered as a part of the
investigations and actions of the Appraisal Phase
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
174
#4 Appraisal Phase Check List (4)
A comprehensive plan for the next phases of the PPP process is in place,
including the procurement method proposed
An appraisal report is finalized containing the conclusions of the appraising
exercises
All the approvals, which are mandatory at the Appraisal Phase, have been
obtained and others, required for the procurement process, have been
identified as well as their main issues
A multidisciplinary and experienced team is engaged to begin the
Structuring Phase
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#15 Planning, Reporting, Approving and Checking
175
16
Outcomes of Appraising
phase
Guide Sections
#13
176
Summary of Outcomes of this Phase
• This phase contributes to the preparation of the PPP project
̵ Government is able to ensure that the project can be done and
understands the main obstacles ahead and actions to overcome them
• The investment decision is made, or confirmed
̵ The Appraisal Phase allows for a deeper understanding of the costs and
benefits of the project, as well as its broader consequences
̵ Government decides if the project is worth implementing
• The procurement decision made
̵ The Value for Money exercise verifies if the PPP route is the most
appropriate delivery method
̵ Commercial feasibility and affordability assessments demonstrate that the
project can be effectively implemented, attracting investors and promoting
a responsible use of fiscal resources
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Appraisal
#16 Outcomes of Appraisal Phase
177
Contact
Andres Rebollo
arebollo@k-infrastructure.com
Richard Foster
richard@fosterinfrastructure.com
This material is intellectual property of Knowledge Infrastructure
and Foster Infrastructure.
It may be only used by the client referred to on the front page of
the document.
Dissemination of this material to any third party other than the
client is not allowed.
In collaboration with
Knowledge Infrastructure, S.L. ©
Foster Infrastructure Pty Ltd ©
October 2020
This material is intellectual property of Knowledge
Infrastructure and Foster Infrastructure.
Dissemination of this material to any third party by
candidates or by the institution is not allowed without prior
consent by K-Infra in writing.
The APMG PPP Certification Program is a registered
Trade Mark of The APM Group Limited. All rights
reserved.
This document is subject to
intellectual property rights and it
its contents cannot be copied,
distributed or transferred without
prior explicit consent by K-infra.
CP3P – Practitioner
Course
Chapter 5
Structuring and Drafting
Tender and Contract
Prepared by
1
Introduction and note
This is the last ppt / chapter of the Preparation level.
In this digital ppt we deal with the foundations of structuring a PPP contract, that is to
say, define (or refine) the financial structure and the risk structure of the project that
has been preliminary defined in Appraisal.
Remember that Appraisal and Structuring are almost a continuous in terms of tasks.
The risk assessment and allocation starts necessarily in Appraisal, as well as a
preliminary definition of the financial structure (and the procurement strategy/tender
process design).
However, as you know, PPP Guide Chapter 5 also covers the subject of structuring the
tender process (RFQ and RFP) in addition to the contract, and also the matter of
drafting all documents (tender documents and the contract itself), but those subjects
pertains to the following exam, Execution, which we hope you will be available to take
it soon!
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
2
Learning objectives
• After studying this chapter, students should understand the
following:
̵ The interactions between the Appraisal Phase and the Structuring Phase
̵ The structuring concept and the importance of allowing sufficient time to
design the project contract
̵ The composition of tasks that are covered during this Phase
̵ The need for the refinement of other analysis and how preparation may be
expanded during this Phase
̵ The concept of financial structuring from the public perspective (defining
public support, revenue regimes, payment mechanisms and developing
availability payments)
̵ The concept of risk structuring and risk allocation
̵ Early termination approaches
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
3
Contents
Objectives and
overview of the
Phase
• Objectives & where we are in the Process Cycle. Interaction with Appraisal
• Definitions and types of structuring
• Main Tasks of structuring phase – including updating the financial model
Financial
Structuring (from
the Public
Perspective):
Defining the
Financial Structure
and Payment
Mechanism
• Elements and competing objectives
• Term Definition
• Pure Co-financing
• Public Loans: Hard or Soft Public Agency Loans
• Filling the Viability Gap of a User-Pays Project
• Equity Participation by the Government
• Other Ways to Increase Financial Feasibility and Affordability
• Categories of Revenue Regimes in PPP Projects
• Financial Structuring Matters in User-Pays Projects
• Volume-Linked Payment Mechanisms
• Availability Payments
Risk Allocation and
Structuring
• Defining Risk: The Risk Management Cycle
• Risk Identification
• Risk Assessment
• Mitigation Measures (early mitigation by the authority)
• Deciding on Risk Allocation
• Contractual Categories of Risks: Compensation, Relief, and Force Majeure Events
• Introducing the Main Project Risks and their Potential Allocation
• Incorporating Risk Allocation into the Contract: General Comments
[Other matters]
• Early termination
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
4
Objectives and Overview of
the Structuring and Drafting
Phase
Guide Sections
#1, #2 & #3
5
#1 Objectives and where we are – objectives of
Structuring and Drafting (as a complete phase)
1.1
• Ensure that the procurement of the PPP Project will be a
success by launching an affordable and feasible project that will
deliver the desired levels of service and a VfM outcome, while
reducing the risk of failure to a minimum
̵ Qualification criteria define the minimum level for what is required as
sufficient capacity to deliver the project and operate it
̵ RFP provides clear instructions to proposers about the documents needed
for the assessment of proposals and clear evaluation criteria – comfort
regarding transparency and equality
̵ Structuring of the contract must protect and maximize the potential VfM by
defining the most appropriate financial and risk structure – includes
revenue structure and appropriate risk allocation
̵ Drafting the contract so as to
o Incorporate the structure
o Ensure effectiveness of contract for contract management
o Align investor´s interest to government objectives
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#1 Objectives & overview
6
#1 Objectives and where we are (2) – interaction
between Appraisal and Structuring
Identifying
projects
Appraising
projects
Structuring
tender &
contract
Tender &
award
Delivering &
commissioning
1.2
Operating &
maintaining
• Final definition of contract
structure (financial and
risk)
• Drafting tender package
(RFQ, RFP and contract)
• Preparation concluded
• Checked and announced
Appraisal provides
Definitive scope and preliminary technical design or detailed project outline
Tests for economic sense (CBA), commercial feasibility, affordability, PPP suitability
(VfM)
Risk assessment and due diligence of legal, environmental and technical risks
Preliminary contract structure, in terms of risk allocation, contract term, revenue
regime and payment mechanism, public financing and guarantees support, etc
Procurement strategy (outline of the tender process)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#1 Objectives & overview
7
#2 Overview of the phase – Definitions and types
of structuring
• PPP Reference Guide - “Structuring a PPP” means allocating
responsibilities, rights and risks to each party to the PPP
contract and drafting the contract
• PPP Certification Guide gives a wider meaning - Not only the
contract, but also the procurement process
• Three main types of “structuring”
2
Box
5.3
&
5.4
̵ Financial and budgetary or fiscal structuring
̵ Risk structuring
̵ Tender/procurement structure
Structuring the PPP project is the process followed for defining the risk structure, the financial
structure (including the payment mechanism) and other key commercial terms of a PPP contract,
as well as the structure or main features that will govern the tender process.
The "structure" will be implanted into a set of documents — the RFP (and potentially the RFQ),
and the contract itself — in a sub-phase or stage that may be called drafting or documenting the
tender package (including the contract).
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#1 Objectives & overview
8
#2 Overview of the phase (2) - Realistic time to
structure and draft
2
• As with appraisal, structuring and drafting is a project in itself – it is crucial to
schedule and organize this work properly in advance as in any project
management function
• The length of this phase depends on the work done in appraisal
• Framework and governance are paramount for a smooth + reliable
structuring & drafting process
• The whole process for final structuring and drafting (as well as finalizing early
mitigation measures) may vary from 6 months for simple projects, to 12 or
18 months for more complex projects
• Appropriate checks before tendering are paramount for a successful project
• This time range assumes the Appraisal Phase produced a well prepared
project with sound feasibility tests and a significantly developed preliminary
contract structure
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#1 Objectives & overview
9
0.Establishing the project team,
incorporating advisors and finalising a
project management plan
2. Finalizing due diligence and
preparation
1. [Defining / confirming the contractual
model and Project-contract scope]
3. Further developing the project
definition and technical requirements (and
refining costs estimates)
6. Refining contract structure: Risk
structure and allocation. (Section 5)
8. Marketing and
testing the project (section 6)
10. Defining qualification criteria.
Structuring & Drafting the RFQ (Section 7)
RFQ is
separate
from RFP in
some
processes
4. [Revisiting economic
analysis]
5. Developing and finalizing the contract
structure: financial structure and
payment mechanism (Section 4)
7. Updating the financial model and
potential reassessment of financial
analysis. Setting the ceiling of payments
9. Defining other commercial terms &
contract provisions (Section 9)
11. Defining proposal requirements and
evaluation criteria. Structuring & Drafting
the RFP (Section 8)
Tasks expained in
detail in this
chapter
Tasks only described
in section 3
(summarised
description of the
phase)
12. Drafting the
Contract
13. Pre-tender interaction: sharing
information with potential bidders
14. Control check
& approvals (Section 10)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#1 Objectives & overview
10
#3 Main tasks of the structuring phase
3
Establish the project
team and finalize the
project management
plan
Define/confirm the
contractual model and
contract scope
Finalize due diligence
and preparation
Further develop the
project definition and
technical requirements
Revisit economic
analysis
Develop and finalize
the contract structure
– financial structure &
payment mech.(*)
Refine the contract
structure – definitive
risk structuring &
allocation (*)
Update the financial
model & potential
confirmation /
reassessment of financial
assessment matters
Test, market and
communicate the
project (▫)
Define and draft other
contractual terms and
contract provisions (*)
Define qualification
(and potentially short
listing) criteria & draft
RFQ (▫)
Define the proposal
requirements and
evaluation criteria &
draft RFP (▫)
Draft the contract and
package the tender
documents (▫)
Pre-tender interaction
(▫)
Control check, approvals
and authorizations (▫)
(*) matters that are the focus of this exam (▫) matters that out of this syllabus
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#1 Objectives & overview
11
Quiz - Interaction with Appraisal
1-Appraisal provides relevant information and outcomes that feed into
Structuring so as to be refined and further developed. Which of the following
are true?
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Appraisal provides definitive scope and preliminary technical design or at
least a detailed project outline
During appraisal the contract has been preliminary structured including
preliminary risk allocation, contract term, revenue regime, payment
mechanism, potential co-financing and/or other financial support such as
guarantees
The procurement strategy is first defined in appraisal including an outline of
the tender process
All are true
Only 1 and 2 are true
Both 2 and 3 are true
None of them are true
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#1 Objectives & overview
12
Quiz - Structuring concept
2-What is true with respect to “structuring”
A. There are two main types of structuring: financial and
budgetary (or fiscal) and risk structuring
B. The "structure" will be implanted into a set of documents —
the RFP (and potentially the RFQ), and the contract itself
C. The length of this phase does not depend on the work done in
appraisal
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#1 Objectives & overview
13
Quiz - Tasks of the Structuring Phase
3-Which one does not accurately describe tasks developed in Structuring Phase as
described in the Guide?
A. Establish the project team and finalize the project management plan, Define/confirm
the contractual model and contract scope, Finalize due diligence and preparation,
Further develop the project definition and technical requirements
B. Develop and finalize the contract structure regarding financial structure & payment
mechanism, Refine the contract structure regarding definitive risk structuring &
allocation, Update the financial model & potential confirmation / reassessment of
financial assessment matters; and Revisit economic analysis
C. Test, market/promote and communicate the project; Define and draft other
contractual terms and contract provisions; Define qualification (and potentially short
listing) criteria & draft RFQ;
D. Define the proposal requirements and evaluation criteria & draft RFP; Draft the
contract and package the tender documents; Develop pre-tender interaction; Carry a
control check and handle approvals and authorizations; Launch the tender
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#1 Objectives & overview
14
2
Financial structuring (from
the public perspective)
Guide Section
#4
15
Contents
Objectives and
overview of the
Phase
• Objectives & where we are in the Process Cycle
• Overview of the Structuring Phase
• Summary Description of Main Tasks to be Carried Out in thus Phase
Financial
Structuring (from
the Public
Perspective):
Defining the
Financial
Structure and
Payment
Mechanism
• Elements of FS and competing objectives
• Term Definition
• Pure Co-financing
• Public Loans: Hard or Soft Public Agency Loans
• Filling the Viability Gap of a User-Pays Project
• Equity Participation by the Government
• Other Ways to Increase Financial Feasibility and Affordability
• Categories of Revenue Regimes in PPP Projects
• Financial Structuring Matters in User-Pays Projects
• Volume-Linked Payment Mechanisms
• Availability Payments
Risk Allocation and
Structuring
[Other matters]
• Defining Risk: the Risk Management Cycle
• Risk Identification
• Risk Assessment
• Mitigation Measures (early mitigation by the authority)
• Deciding on Risk Allocation
• Contractual Categories of Risks: Compensation, Relief, and Force Majeure
Events
• Introducing the Main Project Risks and their Potential Allocation
• Incorporating Risk Allocation into the Contract: General Comments
• Early termination
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
16
#0 Elements of Financial Structuring (FS) and
competing objectives - elements
#8 Userpays
Structure
vs #9
Payment
mechanism
structure
#1 Contract
Term
#2 Pure
cofinancing :
grant
payments
& #4 VGF
Financial
structure &
payment
profile
#8 & #9
Indexation
#7
Revenue
regime
Risk
structure
#3 Cofinancing:
public
loans & #5
equity
#6 “other
means”:
Credit
enhancem
ent & derisking
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
Fig.
5.4
Financial structure, together and
integrated with risk allocation / risk
structure and scope of obligations
forms the heart of the contract structure
Contract
scope &
technical
requirements
#2 Financial structuring
17
#0 Elements of FS and competing objectives –
competing objectives
Box
5.5.
• Government is aiming to ensure that the procurement of the
contract will be a success by launching an affordable and
feasible project that will deliver Value for Money
• The higher the payments or the longer the payment period, the
higher the commercial feasibility – but the greater the fiscal
affordability burden on either government or public
• Government must find the right balance between objectives
(affordability vs commercial feasibility)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
18
Quiz - Elements of Financial Structuring
4-Which does not include an accurate description of elements of
Financial Structuring?
A. Contract term, co-financing effort by grants, co-financing effort
by public loans
B. Equity provided by government, instruments of credit
enhancement
C. Termination scenarios, indexation of payments or user
revenues
D. Revenue regime definition, Payment mechanism structure
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
19
#1 Term definition
• A long term is inherent in PPP contracts: needed for obtaining VfM
from life-cycle management and effective risk transfer
• Also, a longer contract terms allows for longer debt terms which
creates financial efficiency
4.1
oA longer debt term implies higher gearing and lower weighted average cost of
capital (therefore higher affordability) – read box 5.6
oLenders require a cushion so the contract term should be longer than the
maximum debt term available (the “tail of the loan” as a difference between the
debt term and the contract term, so that it is possible to restructure the debt in
case of distress)
• However there may be term limits defined by legislation and practical
limits beyond which there is no additional VfM (which depends on
specific market restrictions, mainly of financial nature)
oAn additional contract term beyond the potential debt term and a reasonable
cushion may not provide the benefit of incremental gearing
• How to define the optimum term of a contract? These and other
factors are explained in the next slides
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
20
#1 Term definition – main considerations
Life-cycle
management
and effective risk
transfer
• The term should be long enough to include lifecycle costs but consider the
impact of uncertainty (e.g. the risk of needing to upgrade a road)
• Longer terms increase risk if the project is highly dependent on technology
Private financial
structure
optimization
• The term should allow bidders to maximize their gearing (which lowers wacc /
increases affordability)
• The contract term therefore should usually be the maximum debt term
available in the particular market + a cushion
• It can be beneficial to create some space for refinancing (e.g. through
miniperm strategy) by expanding the overall term after construction)
Affordability
• The longer the term, the lower the yearly burden on public expenditure (in
government-pays projects), which is especially relevant in large projects
• Caution is needed with respect to government’s aggregated fiscal
burden/exposure (a longer term implies a higher total financial burden/costs)
Commercial
feasibility
(especially in
user-pays
projects)
• A longer term implies more free cash flow and lower potential viability gap (or
higher excess financial value of the project)
• This is especially beneficial when users’ affordability is an issue (or there is a
social objective of keeping the tariff at acceptable levels)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
4.1
21
#1 Term definition – main considerations (2)
Political
pressure
• There may be political / social concern about “unwarranted profits”
with long terms
• This may be solved by specific limits (e.g. Chile terminating the
contract when an amount of revenue is reached) or other profit
sharing mechanisms
Budget
management
rigidity
• PPPs imply fiscal management rigidity and priorities may/will change
over time
Flexibility to
accommodate
risk and
uncertainty
• Long terms allow for flexibility to both parties when dealing with
risks
• However some projects have a risk profile (e.g. significant exposure
to technology risk) that can result in poor VfM if the term is long
Relationships
with other
projects and
other contracts
• Other existing projects may influence the term decision - making
expiration of a new PPP coincident with the expiration date of a
current contract (such as a new LRT line in addition to an existing line
operated under a PPP)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
4.1
22
#1 Term definition – pros & cons of long terms
4.1
Factors in Favour of Longer Terms
Factors for Tempering the Term
•
•
•
•
•
•
More effective risk transfer and
proper life-cycle management.
More financial efficiency by higher
debt/higher leverage in the respective
financial market.
Lower yearly burden/higher
affordability (in year-by-year
budgetary terms).
Greater flexibility to accommodate
changes and deal with risk events.
Greater feasibility due to a longer
term for collecting user payments.
•
•
•
•
•
Incremental risk profile in some projects
(especially those highly exposed to
technological risks) that may reduce
commercial feasibility (in terms of risk
acceptance) and spoil VfM.
Financial market term limits and decremental
value of the equity invested.
Higher fiscal commitment (in overall/
aggregated terms).
Lower flexibility in fiscal policy/ budget
management and service delivery.
Political pressure against potential
unwarranted profits.
Lower country creditworthiness (especially in
government-pays projects) will demand
shorter terms by investors and lenders.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
23
#1 Term definition - What is the Optimum Term?
• There is no standard methodology to determine the optimum term, as it
depends on the specific features of a project and country, e.g.
4.1
̵ fiscal constraints of the relevant country at a certain point of time
̵ the country risk and creditworthiness of the respective government
̵ the access to finance in that market for the specific type of project
̵ the technical and physical nature of the asset and its life-cycle profile
• But it is possible to define a minimum term
̵ Don’t extend it significantly unless necessary due to fiscal restrictions / affordability
̵ Don’t compromise Value for Money
• The term should be at least long enough to capture key life-cycle costs and
enable lenders to provide maximum debt tenor
• Term range from 10 years to 50 years or more
• Most DBFOM contracts are within a range of 15-30 years
• Terms are often shorter in Emerging Markets and Developing Economy
(EMDE) countries
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
24
#1 Term definition - What is the Optimum Term? (2)
4.1
Contract terms
Water & waste EMDE
Social EMDE
Transport EMDE
Water Developed
Social Developed
Transport Developed
EMDE Countries
Developed Countries
0
20
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
40
#2 Financial structuring
25
#1 Term definition – other considerations
• Government can make the term a bid factor
4.1
̵ A term is proposed by each bidder
̵ Bidders that request lower terms score more highly
̵ This may not incentivize effective risk and life-cycle management
• Fixed operating term
̵ The term can be defined as the actual time the construction lasts plus a
fixed number of years of operation
̵ This is less effective in transferring construction risk than a fixed total term
of the contract (incorporating both construction and operations)
̵ It may undermine the alignment of public and private sector interests –
there is less incentive to start operations as soon as practicable
• Overall PPP program/standard terms
̵ It may be beneficial to tender the same type of projects with the same
term
̵ This provides consistency to the market
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
26
Quiz - Term definition
5-Which is NOT true with respect to term definition?
A. The term should be long enough to include lifecycle costs but consider the
impact of uncertainty (e.g. the risk of needing to upgrade a road)
B. The term should allow bidders to maximize their gearing (which lowers
wacc / increases affordability)
C. A longer term implies more free cash flow and lower potential viability gap
(or higher excess financial value of the project)
D. Shorter terms are beneficial when users’ affordability is an issue
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
27
Quiz - Term definition / optimum term
6-Government of Ribamontán is considering to develop a new road under a government-pays
availability based PPP. Technical analysis and common knowledge talks about the need for at least 20
years of term to capture some of the life cycle risk. Government has some concerns regarding
affordability so the longer the term the more affordable will be the Project in terms of yearly
expenditure (lower availability payment per year). Lenders are able to provide long term finance up
to 25 years and a more sophisticated private financing structure (by means of a miniperm followed
by a project bond) could potentially allow for 30 years (however this has not been too much tested
yet in the market). Which one provides a sensible decision and explanation?
A. Contract term should be 30 years as that’s the maximum term for financing
considering the different financing options.
B. Contract term should be 30 years because that represents 5 years over the maximum
term for financing available from the bank community so is giving lenders a material
cushion, and going longer may imply higher liabilities in Net Present Value terms. If a
project bond solution is possible, there could be still a benefit for the public party by
means of longer debt term and higher gearing.
C. Contract term should be 50 years, the maximum term available by the national
legislation, because that will allow the procuring authority to enjoy the maximum
potential increase affordability
D. Term should be 25 years because is sufficiently more than the minimum term advised
by technical experts and it is the maximum term available from Lenders
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
28
#2 Pure co-financing
• Pure co-financing is public financing that is non-revolving - by means
of direct payments for a certain proportion of capital expenditure that
the private partner is not required to pay back
• Pure co-financing is also referred to as grant financing, as these funds
are usually granted to the private partner and treated for legal and/or
private accounting purposes as grants
• Situations in which the government provides pure co-financing
generally fall into three categories:
4.2
̵ Viability gap financing in unfeasible user-pays projects
̵ Increasing commercial feasibility ([including] in viable projects) – especially when
there is risk of unavailability of finance
̵ Increasing affordability/lowering the cost of capital
• Governments providing pure co-financing should take care to avoid
spoiling VfM
• The amount of co-financing commonly ranges from 30% to 40% of
capital costs (for example, in urban rail) but may be higher
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
29
#2 Pure co-financing – types of grants
• Direct grants are the most common form of co-financing, paid
either:
4.2
̵ during construction as a percentage of works in progress or on milestones
̵ or partially or totally at construction completion, or
̵ on a yearly deferred basis as fixed payments – typically when government
lacks liquidity, similar to deferred payment DBF contracts
• Structuring to achieving Value for Money:
̵ Grants should be conditional on achievement of milestones/completion
̵ More risk implies more incentive to meet milestones but introduces
uncertainty for lenders and higher financing costs
̵ Deferring payments implies financial costs
• Grants may be provided in kind (e.g. depots in a LRT)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
30
Hypothetical Project – Not Commercially Viable
with Conventional Financing
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
31
Hypothetical Project – Commercially Viable with
Grants at Milestones
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
32
Hypothetical Project – Borderline Viable with
Grant at Commissioning
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
33
Hypothetical Project – Commercially Viable with
Deferred Grants during Operations
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
34
#2 Pure co-financing - Contract Development Matters
• When and how do payments accrue?
̵ Regardless of when payment will be made, the key issue is when do payments
accrue? In particular, if payments will be made prior to completion / final
acceptance, when does the private partner earn its right to claim the payments?
[examples: CRPAOs in Perú, HSR PPP in Spain] – complementary reading Box 5.7. with
4.2
examples
̵ When payments accrue and when they will be paid has to be clearly reflected in the
contract
• Grant finance from another administration
̵ Grants may also be made by another government (central or regional or local
municipal government)
̵ This is common in transportation and rail
̵ It is good practice for the procuring authority to assume third party government
commitments in the contract, so as to avoid duplicating the counterparty risk for
the private partner
• Who will set grant amount?
̵ In government-pays PPPs, the amount of co-financing is commonly set by the
government in the tender documents, and not subject to offer
̵ In user-pays PPPs, the amount of co-financing is usually proposed by the bidder
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
35
National
Government
Grant
Provincial
Government
PPP
Contract
SPV
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
SPV has one Counterparty
SPV has two Counterparties
Grant finance from another administration
National
Government
Grant
Provincial
Government
Grant
PPP
Contract
SPV
36
Quiz - Pure co-financing
7-What is NOT true with respect to pure co-financing?
A. Pure co-financing is also referred to as grant financing
B. Situations in which the government provides pure co-financing
generally includes viability gap financing, increasing
commercial feasibility, and decreasing affordability
C. Governments providing pure co-financing should take care to
avoid spoiling VfM
D. Pure co-financing is public financing that the private partner is
not required to pay back
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
37
Quiz - Pure co-financing
8-What of the following are true with respect to pure co-financing?
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Direct grants are paid either during construction, or at construction
completion or on a yearly deferred basis as fixed payments
Grants may also be made by another government (central or regional or
local municipal government)
In government-pays PPPs, the amount of co-financing is commonly set by
the government in the RFP while in user-pays PPPs, the amount of cofinancing is usually proposed by the bidder
All of them are true
Only 1 and 2 are true
Only 1 and 3 are true
Only 2 and 3 are true
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
38
#3 Public Loans, hard or soft revolving cofinancing
4.3
• “Co-lending” from a public development bank or public financial agency may
be due to
̵ Lack of market capacity to fully underwrite the debt – the public lender
accompanies commercial lenders (on hard / market conditions)
̵ A need for a cornerstone financier: to increase bankability / enhance credit standing
(on soft conditions [or subordinated in term or guarantees])
• Care is required:
̵ Public loans may produce a ‘crowding out’ effect, reducing private sector lending in
the market
̵ Government may indirectly retain project risks
• “Soft” loan conditions (more favourable than market)
̵ Do not constitute financial structuring of the contract but indirectly affect the
payment profile of the project
̵ Increase affordability [but less than grant financing]
• The public financial agency should analyse the project in advance and the
requirements for eligibility and conditions of the loan should be clear and
accessible to all interested parties
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
39
#3 Public Loans– public subordinated (soft) loans
• Soft loans may be provided by the procuring authority
• They are an alternative to direct and pure (non-revolving) co-financing if on
favourable conditions and subordinated terms
4.3
̵ Used to reduce the weighted average cost of capital
oReduces the long-term burden committed in payment mechanisms (governmentpays PPP)
oDecreases the feasibility gap (user-pays PPP)
• Public debt records may be unaffected if the loan is not treated as a public
investment
• Soft loans are commonly in the form of a participative loan (e.g. tolled roads
in Spain)
̵ That is, the government receives part of the upside of the project in exchange for the belowmarket conditions
• When the loan is provided by the procuring authority, the PPP contract must
clearly deal with intercreditor issues and describe remuneration and rights to
receive distributions
• Examples: BNDES, TIFIA, EIB – complementary reading box 5.8
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
40
Hypothetical Project – Hard Loan
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
41
Hypothetical Project – Soft Loan
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
42
#4 Filling the viability gap of a user-pays PPP –
complementing revenues
4.4
• Viability gap: Some user-pays projects are not fully feasible on the basis of
commercial revenues, but the project is economically viable
̵ Quite common in rail
̵ Some roads (particularly if there are significant structures. E.g. Colombia)
• The gap may be solved by co-financing (pure and revolving with soft
conditions): Lump sum payments/grant financing; Deferred grant; Soft loan /
Participative public loan
• But also by government complementing the private partner’s operating
revenues (mixed revenues or hybrid payment mechanism)
̵ It is preferable for government’s contribution to be “service payments”
o Based on the performance of the service (availability payments), or
o Based on the volume served (shadow tolls)
• Read boxes 5.9 and 5.10 for examples
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
43
Hypothetical Project – Complementing User
Payments with Government Service Payments
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
44
#5 Equity Participation by the Government
• Equity may be provided directly (by the procuring authority) or
through a public infrastructure fund
• Motivations:
4.5
̵ Increase day-to-day control and direct access to the accounts and day to
day management of the SPV
oHowever this creates potential conflicts of interest for government!
oThis may discourage bidders → the issue can be mitigated with trust fund
structures
̵ Government will share in upside/profits → consider contractual options
̵ Make the project commercially feasible (where the required amount of
equity is beyond bidders’ capacity)
̵ Increase affordability (through the public shareholder accepting a lower
required return or different financial rights to a private shareholder)
• Equity participation by government has significant implications
for financial structuring (especially if government’s shares have different
economic rights to those held by the private sector)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
45
#5 Equity Participation by the Gov. (Reasons and
contract provisions)
4.5
• The contract structure / contract package is impacted by the rights and
obligations of the public party as shareholder + special rights of the private
shareholders
̵ This should be captured in the Articles of Association of the SPV and a shareholders’
agreement between the private equity investors and public equity partner (a draft is
part of the tender pack)
̵ Sometimes these rights are also documented in the contract
• Some specific features to be captured:
̵ The public equity partner accepts a lower equity IRR than that of the private equity
holder (if this is the case)
̵ The public party as an equity partner may not be obliged to inject additional equity
if an unexpected capital increase is required as a result of a risk event
̵ The public party’s shares might not have voting rights, but only economic rights
̵ The documents should set out the parties’ rights to sell to third parties
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
46
#6 Other Ways (“indirect means”) to Increase
Financial Feasibility and Affordability
Contractual guarantees
4.6
• Inherent to risk allocation
• e.g. minimum revenue guarantees in roads / take or pay in plants
Foreign exchange risk guarantees
• A subtype of the former, when local financial markets are
underdeveloped [contractual guarantees/compensation, direct
guarantees to lenders]
Explicit/financial guarantees or
direct guarantees from the treasury
• To guarantee project debt;
• Sometimes only apply during construction (e.g. UK)
Guarantees in respect of
government counter-party risk
(guarantee funds)
• Provides security for government payment obligations [by
creating a liquidity fund managed by a (usually) public trustee]
Guarantees of a portion of the
service payments
• Limits on the maximum deduction from availability payments
Specific credit enhancement
mechanisms
• [usually from third party agencies] like International Financial
Institutions (IFIs), e.g. Project Bond Credit Enhancement by EIB
• Not to incorporate in the financial model unless access is granted
and work the access in advance
Decomposition of the payment
mechanism
• Creating an irrevocable and unconditional tranche that may be
transferred to third parties [e.g. through securitization] – example
“cessions daily” in France
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
47
Quiz - Co-financing and other financial support
9-The government of Ribamontan is analysing a number of options for financial support.
Which of the following strategies and assertions look adequate and sensible?
NOTE: availability of finance is not a concern in this market
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Co-finance by means of grant financing during the 3 year of construction, with a 20% of the
CapEx amount, so as to decrease the volume of availability payments, provided that
government can afford those payments during the years of construction period. This will for
sure decrease the NPV of all payments and make the project more affordable.
Providing public equity is discarded as it will not help affordability (i.e. will not decrease the
wacc of the Project) unless equity IRR for public party is lower, but then would be preferable to
provide a soft subordinated loan to diminish risk exposure. Also government is concerned
about issues of conflict of interest.
Providing a soft loan would be the best solution because the increase in affordability is the
same than in the case of grant financing with the advantage of recovering the amount invested
Only 1 and 2 are correct
Only 1 and 3 are correct
Only 2 and 3 are correct
All are correct
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
48
#7 Revenue regimes
• User-pays schemes are typical in economic infrastructure and
government pays in social infrastructure
• However government payments may also occur in economic
infrastructure projects if:
4.7
̵ The PPP is just one component of a broader network or service (for which
there is already an incumbent operator collecting the user fees)
̵ There are user charges but there is a viability gap
̵ Government decides not to charge users
̵ Government retains user payments to retain the risk and reward of toll
collection
• The decision to have government payments should be made in
the Appraisal Phase, based on risk and Value for Money
considerations
̵ This should include definition of the payment mechanism (availability vs
volume)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
49
#8 User-Pays Financial Structuring Matters
4.8
Tariff
levels
• In roads: some flexibility with government setting a cap per type of vehicle
and cap on the average tariff. More flexibility in dynamic tolling
• Passenger / public transport and water supply tariffs are always regulated
Indexation
Financial
structuring
matters in
user-pays
PPPs
Risk
structuring
related to
volume
risk
• Most commonly general CPI (sometimes with a correction
factor), but sometimes CPI for a specific industry / sector or a
polynomic formula
• Gross domestic product (GPD) is also used in some roads
• Tariff reviews in some sectors (energy) with pass through of
fuel cost
Payment /
fee to
procuring
authority
Unfeasible
projects /
Viability
gap
• Excess revenue may be structured as an up front
and/or deferred payment to the procuring
authority (rather than decreasing the tariff)
• Deferred payments: may be fixed or variable (as
a percentage of revenues)
• Most typical in brownfield projects
• The viability gap can be filled through pure co-financing, soft
loans, or complementary payments
• Pure co-financing: payments during construction vs deferred
• Minimum traffic / minimum revenue guarantees are seen in transport [sometimes
government’s contributions are construed as a subordinated loan – M5 Hungary]
• Off take agreements in plants and take or pay formulas
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
50
Minimum Revenue Guarantee and Sharing
Excess Revenues – Two Sides of One Coin
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
51
Quiz - User-Pays structuring matters
10-Which of the following is NOT true?
1.
2.
3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Excess revenue may be structured as an up front and/or deferred payment
to the procuring authority and should not be applied to decrease the
tariff/charge to users
The viability gap can be filled through pure co-financing, soft loans, or
complementary payments
The most common form of indexation of tariff is CPI for a specific industry /
sector or a polynomic formula, rather than general CPI
Only 1 is true
Only 2 is true
Only 3 is true
All are true
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
52
#9 Volume-Linked Payment Mechanisms–
favourable conditions and back loaded nature
4.9
• Like availability payments, volume-linked payments may be used in user-pays
as complementary payments
• The decision to use these should be made in appraisal
• Shadow payments that are based on volume (demand, number of cubic
meters etc.) introduce demand or volume risk (which may be difficult to
control / manage)
• Conditions that are favourable for volume risk payment structures include:
̵ Clear alignment of interests AND
̵ Traffic or volume risk is considered reasonably assessable and manageable by the
private partner (e.g. never when there is an incumbent operator who will continue
in that role, with the PPP private partner only responsible for maintenance and
ancillary services)
• Back loaded nature: (in transport) volume based payments typically increase
over time [see next slide]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
53
#9 Volume-Linked Payment Mechanisms–
conditions favourable and back loaded nature (2)
•
•
•
•
4.9
Shadow tolls grow as long-term demand grows (generally in line with GDP)
This is an advantage for the public party (higher average life of payments) especially in
the early years of the contract
But it increases the overall burden* (higher average life of payments!) and diminishes
fiscal space for future governments
And… the DSCR required by lenders and equity IRR requested by the investor will be
correspondingly higher
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
54
#9 Volume-Linked structuring elements (1) –
Volume risk structuring
4.9
• The final structuring usually focuses on delineating and limiting
the volume risk
• It is common to establish a system of bands to temper risk /
share part of the risk and reward
̵ At lower traffic volumes, the shadow fare increases to compensate for part
of the loss of revenue
̵ The tariff decreases if the traffic volume is above a defined band
̵ The procuring authority should avoid entirely protecting the private partner
from the risk
̵ There should be a maximum traffic level above which government makes
no payment (to avoid open-ended fiscal exposure)
oExcept for compensating the private partner for extraordinary levels of traffic to
cover higher O&M costs and increased or accelerated renewals
–This can be achieved through a small shadow toll approximately equal to the marginal O&M
cost, or through a right to negotiate compensation
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
55
Volume Risk Structuring Example – Roads
From
(Million
Vehicle
Kilometres)
To
(Million
Vehicle
Kilometres)
Payment
(cents per Vehicle
Kilometre)
Band 1
0
70
9
Band 2
70
100
6
Band 3
100
130
3
Band 4
130
Band
Source: National Audit Office (UK),
The Private Finance Initiative: The
First Four Design, Build, Finance and
Operate Roads Contracts
0
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
56
#9 Volume-Linked structuring elements (2) –
Indexation of Shadow Tariffs
4.9
• The most common approach is to link the payment to the Consumer Price
Index, CPI or another price/cost inflation indicator
̵ Rationale: To link the inflation of the price of the service to that of the general
economy or relevant sector
̵ This increases the payments over time, increasing the affordability of payments in
early years
̵ CPI is usually a national measure, but sometimes regional (this is sensible only
when/if the project cost inflation is clearly better correlated with the regional
economy)
• Some projects use a fixed indexation factor
̵ The private partner will charge a risk premium for this, or hedge its inflation
exposure
• Other projects use a polynomic indexation formula based on different price
indexes for different cost factors
̵ This may only be appropriate for very specific projects
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
57
Indexation – Why Use Actual CPI rather than a
Fixed Percentage?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
58
#9 Volume-Linked structuring elements (3) –
Performance Correction
4.9
• Volume linked payments are not inherently linked to
performance requirements
• But the contract may provide that a breach of established
performance levels results in a penalty or liquidated damages
• As in some Availability Payments, some systems include a
“quality component”: deductions / penalties may arise as a
function of the number of performance points accrued
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
59
Quiz - Volume-linked structuring
11-Which of the following is NOT true?
A. Volume risk payment structures make sense when traffic or volume risk is
considered reasonably assessable and manageable by the private partner
and is in the interest of the procuring authority to promote higher volume
of use
B. Shadow payments that are based on volume (demand, number of cubic
meters etc.) introduce demand or volume risk, which is beneficiary as it
generates VfM
C. The back load nature of shadow tolls means that payments grow as longterm demand grows so there is higher average life of payments. But this will
increase the overall financial burden to the government
D. It is common to establish a system of bands to temper risk / share part of
the risk and reward
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
60
#10 Availability Payments
• Should be used when the level of use of the infrastructure is not a public
objective [or when volume risk is not bearable by the private party]
4.10
̵ This is the most common payment regime in social infrastructure
̵ It is increasingly used in transportation (roads, rail) and water (transport, treatment)
̵ Used in energy generation (in Power Purchase Agreements) and transmission
• Government only pays for the asset or services when they are available (“no
payments” until completion) and to the extent they are available
• Two general criteria:
̵ Physical availability (the infrastructure is available to use)
̵ Deemed availability (determined by reference to condition criteria)
• The payment mechanism should be unitary (prorated by time units)
̵ with a caveat for EMDEs → see next slide
̵ With potential nuances → see slide 51
Payment
due
Maximum
payment
Availability
deductions
• Higher Bankability than in volume payments
̵ Availability risks are ultimately operational risks (intrinsically manageable - subject to
reasonable criteria: realistic, objective and measurable)
̵ The payment is usually segmented into sections (roads) or areas (social)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
61
#10 Availability Payments– immature PPP
markets
• The PPP availability payment mechanism is unitary in nature – no service, no
payment
• Some EMDEs opt for non-standard de-risking approaches:
4.10
Box
5.12
̵ Tranching the payment, dividing the payment amount into three components:
o Repayment of the principal, and interest on the senior debt, which may be exempted from
any deduction once the asset is built and commissioned
o Equity repayment and reward [which could be merged with the former]
o O&M costs
̵ Limiting the deduction to be applied in payment calculations but also then carrying
forward the deduction not applied, and applying it against future payments.
̵ Alternatively, if, without applying the limit, the deductions exceed a specified
amount then the contract will be terminated
• Breaking the unitary concept to protect lenders, or to increase commercial
acceptance of the PPP, may remove the incentive for high standards in
performance and therefore reduce VfM
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
62
#10 Availability Payments – nuances and
calibration
• Performance requirements and availability criteria
̵ must be objective, measurable and realistic
̵ must be challenging but achievable
̵ should be driven by the value of the availability and urgency for remedy
̵ high standards are compatible with acceptable risk (higher standards may have
longer rectification periods or modest deductions, while lower standards may have
shorter rectification periods or higher deductions)
4.10
Box
5.13
• Non critical requirements (e.g. cleanliness of the waiting room in a hospital)
may be dealt with in a specific payment stream – this gives flexibility for
changes in “soft services”
• The performance requirements and availability criteria should be tailormade, but precedents and generic standards are a useful input
• The procuring authority should conduct ‘dry runs’ and calibration
oRefining and assigning final numbers to the various parts of the mechanism
oRunning simulations of performance scenarios in a model to assess the financial impact of
different grades of performance
oDoes an acceptable performance produce an undesired outcome (e.g. bankruptcy)?
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
63
Quiz - Availability Payments
12-Which of the following is NOT true?
A. Calibrating the payment mechanism implies assigning final numbers to the
various parts of the mechanism so as to run simulations of performance
scenarios to assess the financial impact of different levels of performance
B. One reason for higher bankability in volume payments than in availability
payments is that volume payments increases over time
C. Is not uncommon for EMDE markets to apply non-pure standard
approaches in designing availability payment schemes like “tranching the
payment” (dividing the payment amount into components) or limiting the
deduction to be applied in payment calculations
D. Performance requirements and availability criteria must be objective,
measurable and realistic, as well as challenging but achievable
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
64
#10 Availability Payments– elements and
structuring matters
4.10
Availability /
unavailability
definition. Categories
and faults
Composition of a
unitary payment
Adjustment factors or
deductions
Time weighting
factors*
Rectification periods
Ratchet
mechanisms*
Maintenance works
and other exceptions
Indexing
First payment and
early completion
Other payments and
adjustments
Frequency and
calculation process
(*) Represent matters / headings of #4.10 that are not part of Preparation syllabus
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
65
#i Availability / unavailability definition.
Categories and faults
4.10.1
• Two general sets of criteria
̵ Those related to physical availability for use
̵ Those related to “condition criteria”: ‘deemed unavailability’ – the asset or
service is regarded unavailable even though it is being used
• Deemed unavailability
̵ When performance thresholds (“condition criteria”) for an acceptable level
of service are not met (e.g. index of roughness or lighting levels in a road)
̵ Especially those related to safety and security [in transport context]
• A performance monitoring regime must be in place to assess
availability. The procuring authority must define [described in section
9, not included in syllabus]
̵ Who performs the monitoring
̵ Who pays for the monitoring
̵ This is linked to the reporting obligations of the private partner
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
66
#ii Composition of a unitary payment
• The unitary payment covers all of the private partner’s costs
• It is divided into segments when practicable
4.10.2
̵ The segments correspond to parts of the infrastructure (that are self-contained,
with their own economic sense)
o Areas of a hospital or other social infrastructure facility
o Sections of a road
̵ Payments/deductions are calculated by area or section
̵ Each area / section will have its own weighting
o Critical areas have the most severe deductions
o Sections of a road are usually weighted in terms of use/traffic
̵ Functional unit weightings determine the size of the deduction
• The payment is earned for each section or area by
̵ Units of time - availability may be measured in units of days, hours or [not often
used in practice] minutes
̵ Trips – on rail systems
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
67
#iii Adjustment factors or deductions
• Adjustments depend on the seriousness of the unavailability – i.e.
seriousness of the condition criteria being breached
• Other factors
4.10.3
̵ The area (or section in a road) that is unavailable, as some areas or sections will have higher
weightings than others
̵ The length of time for which the area or section is unavailable
̵ Potentially, the specific time of the day and year (month or day of the week), especially in
transport projects [i.e. time weighting factors]
̵ Potentially, the persistence or repetition of the breach – ratchet mechanisms
̵ Whether the asset (or the area affected) is effectively being used despite the unavailability –
especially in road projects
• Payments are usually calculated from bottom to top (summing up payments
earned per unit of time, duly adjusted by the adjusting factor)
• Deductions / adjustments may be larger than the value of the payment in a
specific time period, but the actual overall deduction is limited to 100% for
payment calculations [e.g. when calculating the monthly payment]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
68
#v Rectification periods
• A rectification period is a period of time to remedy a breach so that it is not 4.10.5
taken into account for the purpose of deductions
• The rectification period starts from the moment the breach is detected
• If the breach is rectified within the specified period, there is no deduction for
unavailability
• If the breach is not rectified within the specified period, the deduction is
calculated from the moment breach detected
• Not every breach should have a rectification period
• Critical criteria should not have rectification periods
• Unavailability starts when the event is detected (through monitoring and
scheduled inspections) or reported (by the procuring authority [through
direct inspections] or an interested party – e.g. a teacher in a school)
• Temporary fixes: some unavailability events require an immediate response
regardless of the rectification period (e.g. glass broken in a school requires
placing boards immediately before replacing)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
69
Example: Rectification Period Commencement
Calculation of the Available Prisoner Place Failure
Abatement
1.
If the Unavailability… is not Rectified.. within the
Unavailability Rectification Period, an… Abatement
will apply…
2.
The Unavailability Rectification Period will
commence at the moment that the Unavailability:
a)
first comes to the attention of any member of Staff;
b)
is detected by the BMS or any other automatic
monitoring or alarm system; or
c)
should have come to the attention of any member of
Staff or should have been detected by the BMS or
any other automatic monitoring or alarm system, if
Project Co was complying with its obligations under
this Agreement,
“BMS” = Business
Monitoring System
whichever is the earlier.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
70
#vii Maintenance Work and other Exceptions to
Unavailability
4.10.7
• Maintenance does not constitute an unavailability event
provided it is in accordance with agreed maintenance plans –
this can be implemented by:
̵ Allocating a zero time weighting factor to specific periods of the day
̵ Granting a “bag of maintenance hours” to be used at less disruptive times
• Other exceptions – an area or section is not regarded as
unavailable if the cause is:
̵ A police order or other lawful requirement
̵ An accident in a road projects
̵ An excused event described and regulated in the contract
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
71
#viii Indexing
• The price of the service should be the same during the whole life of 4.10.8
the contract, with the exception of changes in capital works or
services (the procuring authority should avoid tailor making the slope
of payments to artificially back-load the payments)
• The cost of the service is not entirely linked to inflation (usually less
than 50%):
̵ equity is exposed to inflation risk,
̵ O&M cost will change roughly in accordance with CPI, but
̵ debt service is mostly a fixed cost – the private partner hedges the interest rate risk,
converting interest payable to a fixed rate for the life of the loan
• Availability-based projects opt for a compounded indexation formula
– only a proportion of the unitary charge is adjusted for inflation
• This allows the project company to accelerate the debt repayment
compared to full CPI indexation [and this diminishes the overall
financial burden to the procuring authority]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
72
Indexing a Unitary Payment – A Prison Example
Healthcare Cost
Component
Indexed using the Health Price Index
Staff Cost
Component
Indexed using the Wage Price Index
Maintenance Cost
Component
Capital Cost
Component
Indexed using the Consumer Price
Index (general inflation)
Not Indexed
Availability Payment
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
Source: Simplified adaptation from State Government of Victoria
(Australia), Ravenhall Prison Project Agreement
73
#ix First payment and early completion
• Availability is about paying for the ability to use the asset
• Payments during construction should be avoided
• Exceptions:
4.10.9
̵ Parts or areas of the infrastructure that can be effectively used (certain
stretches in a road, multifacility projects)
̵ O&M costs of existing infrastructure
• Early completion
̵ The contract should regulate this situation
̵ The procuring authority should have no obligation to pay for the asset if
availability starts before the target date
̵ Early availability is usually in the interest of the procuring authority, but it
may not be ready to make payments – the solution may be to establish an
early completion floor
̵ If construction is completed ahead of schedule it is customary to establish
at least a ‘cut’ payment to cover O&M costs
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
74
#x Other Payments and Adjustments
• Inverse volume risk adjustments in transport projects:
4.10.
10
̵ Availability of transport infrastructure is unrelated to the actual traffic or
volume
̵ But maintenance costs and life-cycle costs will vary with intensity of use
̵ To avoid misalignment of interests between parties, the procuring authority
may
oDefine a shadow payment linked to volume intended to cover the “marginal O&M
cost”, or
oRevisit the unitary charge value if traffic consistently exceeds a threshold
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
75
#x Other Payments and Adjustments (2)
• Service payments for some soft services in social infrastructure
and benchmarking of costs:
4.10.
10
̵ Availability based payments are appropriate for most accommodation
facilities, e.g. hospitals or schools
̵ Availability parameters are designed for an occupation level
̵ More demand implies higher variable costs for the private partner
̵ Above thresholds of occupancy, O&M costs will rise
̵ Therefore
oThe contract should provide an adjustment to unitary payment when occupation
is above threshold, or
oConsider a separate ad hoc payment component for certain services that are very
sensitive to demand
̵ Benchmarking [value testing]
oCPI does not capture all changes in the cost of certain services [e.g. cleaning]
oAim to adjust the unitary charge in line with changing market conditions through
benchmarking of costs [or alternatively use market testing]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
76
#x Other Payments and Adjustments (3)
• Subjective adjustments and user satisfaction components of a
payment mechanism:
4.10.
10
̵ Quality of service cannot easily be reduced to a practical set of availability
and performance criteria
̵ Satisfaction surveys can be used as a small part of the overall payment
regime
̵ The financial impact should be small
̵ The private partner may be obliged to conduct a survey or performance
audit at its own expense
̵ Poor scoring requires a remedial plan and may result in a direct deduction
in the yearly payment (or accrue performance points)
̵ High scoring may result in a bonus
̵ Subjective quality factors should only affect the equity return, and only to a
modest extent
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
77
#xi Frequency and payment calculation process
• The contract must clearly state when payments will be made 4.10.
11
and the process to calculate the payment earned
• Monitoring and calculations are complex – usually payments are
made no more frequently than quarterly
• Avoid requiring the private partner to finance significant
working capital: calculate deductions each month and make
payments monthly in arrears or
• Middle path solution – determine deductions on a quarterly
basis but with monthly “advanced payments” based on a
notional deduction
• Delays in payment should be subject to interest rates consistent
with that of the private partner under its financial agreements
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
78
Quiz - Availability Payments structuring matters
13-Pick the incorrect statement
A. The adjustment on the payment due to a breach of a condition should
depend on how relevant is the a condition criteria or specification being
breach.
B. Deductions / adjustments may be larger than the value of the payment in a
specific time period, however the total deduction during one month may be
usually limited to 100% of the maximum monthly payment.
C. The unitary payment covers all of the private partner’s costs. However it is
customary to divide it into segments. An example would be dividing a road
by fixed stretches of 1 km or segmenting the payment in a hospital by
weighting its areas considering the surface of each of them
D. A rectification period is a period of time to remedy a breach so that it is not
taken into account for the purpose of deductions, but not every breach
should have a rectification period
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
79
Quiz - Availability Payments structuring matters
14-Pick the incorrect statement
A. Unavailability will only start when the unavailability event is detected
through scheduled inspections
B. A closure of a carriageway in a highway due to maintenance should not
constitute an unavailability event provided it is in accordance with agreed
maintenance plans
C. In terms of indexation, availability-based projects opt for a compounded
indexation formula – only a proportion of the unitary charge is adjusted for
inflation. This is because cost of service is not entirely linked to inflation
and this provides financial efficiency as debt repayment is more accelerated
D. Early completion situation: early availability is usually in the interest of the
procuring authority, but it may not be ready to make payments – the
solution may be to establish an early completion floor
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
80
Quiz - Availability Payments structuring matters
15-Pick the incorrect statement
A. Inverse volume risk adjustments in transport projects happens because
availability of transport infrastructure is unrelated to the actual traffic or
volume but maintenance costs and life-cycle costs will vary with intensity of
use
B. In the former case (A), to avoid misalignment of interests between parties,
the procuring authority may define a small shadow payment linked to
volume or revise the value of the payment if traffic consistently exceeds a
defined threshold
C. In a social infrastructure PPP based on availability payment, if
demand/occupancy is higher than expected and considered in the design of
the facility, private partner should be compensated for increased in O&M
costs
D. Yearly payments may be an appropriate frequency of payments considering
how complex are monitoring and calculations in these projects
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#2 Financial structuring
81
3
Risk Allocation and
Structuring
Guide Section
#5
82
Contents
Objectives and
overview of the
Phase
• Objectives & where we are in the Process Cycle
• Overview of the Structuring Phase
• Summary Description of Main Tasks to be Carried Out in thus Phase
Financial
Structuring (from
the Public
Perspective)
• Elements of FS and competing objectives
• Term Definition
• Pure Co-financing
• Public Loans: Hard or Soft Public Agency Loans
• Filling the Viability Gap of a User-Pays Project
• Equity Participation by the Government
• Other Ways to Increase Financial Feasibility and Affordability
• Categories of Revenue Regimes in PPP Projects
• Financial Structuring Matters in User-Pays Projects
• Volume-Linked Payment Mechanisms
• Availability Payments
Risk Allocation and
Structuring
[Other matters]
• Defining Risk: The Risk Management Cycle
• Risk Identification
• Risk Assessment
• Mitigation Measures (early mitigation by the authority)
• Deciding on Risk Allocation
• Contractual Categories of Risks: Compensation, Relief, and Force Majeure
Events
• Introducing the Main Project Risks and their Potential Allocation
• Early termination
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
83
#1 General concepts of risk allocation
5.1
Definition and rationale
55.1
• Risk allocation: define which party will assume each risk (and to what extent)
to achieve VfM
• Risk transfer to private partner relates to search for efficiency
̵ The key motivation for undertaking a project as a PPP
• Transfer of financial consequences creates incentive to supply timely services
(as scheduled) and in the required condition
• Theory: allocate to the party best placed to reduce likelihood and control
consequences but government should recognise that it remains exposed to
reputational risk and is ultimately responsible for service outcomes
• The private partner will charge a risk premium for accepting transferred risks
o If the premium is higher than the expected loss for the public sector if the risk is retained,
taking back the risk increases VfM
o Some risks may be not acceptable to private partner at any price/premium
o Or some risks may be tolerable for the private partner but the public sector is better placed
to manage them
• Some risks are shared instead of transferred
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
84
#1 General concepts of risk allocation
5.1
Definition and rationale ii
55.1
• Interaction with Appraisal phase in terms of risks
̵ Appraisal Phase
Box
5.15
oGovernment will have identified and assessed risks, and
oDefined the preliminary risk allocation structure
–Necessary for VfM calculations, commercial feasibility and affordability assessments
̵ Structuring Phase
oRisk allocation is reviewed and refined to incorporate into contract
oRisk structure (pre-structure) should be shared in advance with the market
oMaterial changes should be avoided/carefully communicated
oSignificant changes will affect the results of the appraisal
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
85
#1 General concepts of risk allocation
5.1
Optimum allocation (VfM vs judgement)
• Theoretical / numerical VfM: when the marginal VfM of changing the risk
allocation is negative
• Noting that results of quantitative risk analysis are uncertain by themselves
or some risks are by definition unquantifiable
• Judgement: “Is the private partner better placed or able to manage this risk
more efficiently than the public partner?”
55.1
• Best able to manage
̵ Greatest ability to prevent
̵ Capable to best deal with consequences
̵ Ability to price risk
“Best able to carry the risk at the least cost”
(OECD)
• Exception to VfM rule: ensure
bankability / commercial feasibility in
EMDEs by de-risking projects
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
86
#1 General concepts of risk allocation
5.1
Endogenous versus Exogenous Risks, structuring &
allocating
Endogenous v exogenous
• Endogenous risks – the private
partner can do something to
ensure that the actual outcome
approximates to the expected
outcome
• Exogenous risks – risks that the
private partner, and in many
cases either party, cannot
control
55.1
Allocation v structuring
• Risk structuring implements and
develops risk allocation further into
the contract:
̵ Specifying and nuancing the definition of the
risk events
̵ Specifying the extent to, and the form in
which, each party assumes each of the risks
̵ And how the party that has not been
allocated the risks will be compensated if the
risk occurs
• [contract development: risk can be
allocated through specific provisions
or by nuancing and qualifying other
provisions]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
87
#2 Defining Risk & risk management cycle
Definitions
5.2
• OECD “the probability that the actual outcome will deviate from the
expected outcome”
• Australia “the chance of an event occurring which would cause
actual project circumstances to differ from those assumed when
forecasting project benefit and costs”
• UK (orange book) “uncertainty of outcome, whether positive
opportunity or negative threat, of actions and events”
• Essence of risk characterize by two factors
̵ The likelihood: probability of the risk event occurring within the project
X
̵ The impact: financial value of the risk event’s effects
• Prioritization: focus should be on risks that have a high degree of
expected loss
• Uncertainty (unmeasurable risk) vs measurable risk – the former
reflected in ordinal / non-numerical probabilities
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
88
#2 Defining Risk & risk management cycle
Risk Management Cycle – Public Perspective
5.2
Structuring and drafting contract.
Risk allocation is refined and incorporated into
the contract (mostly based on qualitative
assessment).
Risk
identification
Risk
assessment
Preliminary
allocation
(early) Risk
mitigation
Risk
allocation
For risks transferred
Appraisal Phase. Risk assessment
and pre-allocation incorporated in VfM
analysis and financial analysis
(commercial feasibility and affordability).
More exhaustive: uses a risk register (but for
preliminary allocation may use a risk allocation matrix)
Quantitative assessment is mostly used for
VfM and financial analysis and qualitative
assessment for pre-allocation.
Risk
monitoring
Ex-post
management
Contract management.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
Risk
structuring
For risks retained
Risk
treatment
Risk
monitoring
Ex-post
management
89
#2 Defining Risk & risk management cycle
5.1
Efective management strategy – public perspective
• For retained risks, the public partner will develop specific
management strategies for each risk:
5.2
̵ Self-insuring and building up contingency funds in the budget
̵ Contracting out insurance policies for some risks
̵ Entering into hedging mechanisms for some financial or economic risks
(e.g. inflation)
̵ Relying on reactive management when a particular risk occurs
̵ Uninsurable risks
• Design and operate a monitoring system for all risks
̵ Review the identified risks
̵ Detect new risks as they arise
̵ Establish how to deal with the risks when they occur, including risks that
have been transferred
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
90
#2 Defining Risk & risk management cycle
Instruments and risk strategies - Private Perspective
• For transferred risks, the private partner has a range of tools
and possible strategies available:
5.2
Box
5.17
̵ Absorb the risk and price it into the financial offer
̵ Pass on the risk to contractors through the project contracts – there
emerges a counterparty risk
̵ Contract out a coverage or an insurance
• Develop and implement a risk plan for all risks
̵ Preventative and reactive measures
̵ Risk monitoring system
• Decision to retain or transfer will depend on third parties’
ability to manage the risk (by absorbing or even passing it
through to subsequent third parties in a cascade).
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
91
#3 Risk Identification – what is involved
5.1
• Define a comprehensive list of risk events
• Usually grouped into categories
• Describe them to clearly understand how they will impact the project
outcome if they materialize
5.3
̵ More exhaustive during Appraisal (using a risk register), for VfM and commercial
feasibility
̵ Less exhaustive during Structuring, for risk allocation
• Some risks are only assessed by private party (e.g. credit counterparty risk)
and some only assessed at country/program level (e.g. convertibility)
• Multiple classifications – but all potential events should be identified and
treated in terms of qualification, quantification and allocation
• Eliminate the risk of ‘blind spots’ and avoid double counting of natural
overlaps → risk register
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
92
#3 Risk Identification – purpose of a risk register 5.1
• Conduct an orderly quantitative risk assessment during Appraisal, and
• Define the financial base case in order to conduct the commercial feasibility analysis
and conduct the VfM exercise
• Identify and avoid ‘blind spots’
• Handle overlaps
• However allocation is more frequently handled through a “risk allocation matrix”
5.3
Note: The example of risk
register is an extra,
included to help
participants understand
the potential contents of
such a tool. It is not
included in the Guide and
not subject to
examination.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
93
#3 Risk identification – risk matrix (purpose and
composition)
5.1
• Identifies and systematically describes all [relevant] risks properly,
̵ how they affect the project (and in what form)
̵ potential mitigation measures (a risk may potentially have a severe impact, but be
easy to mitigate)
̵ Some matrixes includes the qualitative assessment → see tolerability matrix #4
5.3
Box
5.18
• Developed for every project, containing at least:
̵ Risk name and category
̵ Risk description
̵ Risk effects/consequences
̵ Measures to mitigate the risk, where available
̵ Risk allocation – the party who bears the risk (and extent of risk when it is shared)
• Helps government organize the risk analysis and record the risk allocation
decision to be incorporated into the contract
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
94
#3 Risk Identification – the Guide´s risk categories5.1
• Site risks: Availability of the site, design risks, environmental, permits, and
ground conditions
• Design risks
• Construction risks
• Commissioning risks
• Revenue risks: Demand/usage (in user-pays and volume payment
mechanisms), price or tariff risk (in user-pays), availability and quality risks,
third party revenue risks, and so on
• Maintenance risks
• Other operating risks
• Financial risks
• Changes in law
• Force majeure risks
• Early termination risks
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
5.3
95
#4 Risk assessment – quantitative assessment
5.1
• Estimating or defining values of the possible outcomes or
“expected values” - also referred to as “adjusting values for risk”
• Usually applied during Appraisal for financial analysis, VfM and
CBA
• Values may be presented in two different ways:
5.4.
1
̵ a) The most likely of possible outcomes
̵ b) The full range of possible outcomes, including their probabilities
• Most common approach is to define the base case of the
project’s main cash flows on the basis of the most likely
outcome
• Sensitivity analysis allows government to test the robustness
and resilience of the project’s financial architecture and
estimate the contingencies built in by the private partner
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
96
#4 Risk assessment – qualitative assessment &
risk allocation
5.1
5.4.
2
• Uses nominal (1,2,3 …) or descriptive (high, medium…) scales for the
two dimensions (likelihood and impact)
• Known as semi-quantitative
• Translated in a “risk tolerability matrix”, used to prioritize
• Allocation exercise concentrates in the yellow and red zones
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
97
#5 Mitigation Measures (early mitigation by the
authority)
5.1
5.5
• Optimizing scope of the project and the planning process, e.g.
̵ Avoid innovation and complexity if the benefit does not outweigh the cost
̵ Choose a realistic delivery date
̵ Plan crucial building activities during the summer so there is less risk of
weather related delays
• Robust investigations , e.g.
̵ Studies that enable the parties to better assess risks: archaeological maps,
geo-technical studies, traffic and revenue studies, utility location,
environmental and social impact assessment, etc.
̵ Incorporate into contract to create a baseline by which some risks will be
allocated as they occur versus provided “for information purposes”
• The tender/selection process itself
̵ By ensuring the capacity of the awardee to develop and handle properly
the project and its risks
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
98
#6 Deciding on Risk Allocation - Default situation 5.1
• Risk transfer is defined by the contract scope and the PPP
contract structure
• Default position on risk allocation is defined by two interrelated
factors:
5.6
̵ Scope of obligations and service: which performance requirements
must be met to entitle the private partner to payments (or the
ability to charge the user) and to what extent the private partner has
to finance the project
̵ How and when will the private partner be paid and under which
regime (including the payment mechanism in government-pays
contracts)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
99
#6 Deciding on Risk Allocation - General rules
5.1
1. Design, construction, commissioning, operations,
maintenance, revenues, and financial risks should be
generally transferred to private partner, unless risk
assessment clearly recommends the opposite
2. Risks related to responsibilities not naturally embedded in
the scope or revenue regime should be retained, as well as
direct actions by public partner affecting/changing
obligations (contract changes and discriminatory changes in
law)
3. Risks beyond the respective responsibilities and capability of
either party should be generally shared
Note that it may be appropriate that contract transfer some
portion of the risk (even if is completely out of private
partner´s control) to incentivize the private partner to mitigate
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
5.6
100
#6 Deciding on Risk Allocation - Exceptions to
general rules
5.6
• For risks connatural with scope – It is appropiate to take back
risks when there is evidence that the private partner will not
add value
• For risks not related to scope (e.g. vandalism affecting assests
not constructed by private partner but related to its assets and
close to them)
→ see “dealing with exceptions”
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
101
#6 Deciding on Risk Allocation - Risks that Should
Never be Transferred
5.6
• Force majeure events (including acts of god)
• Changes in service requirements or scope of works needed to
adapt the project to new circumstances
• Discriminatory changes in law or policy, and other actions by the
government that negatively affect the project economics
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
102
#6 Deciding on Risk Allocation- Dealing with
exceptions – which risks should be taken back?
5.6
• Judgement is of essence
• Take back the risk if none of these factors are present:
̵ The private partner has a greater ability to assess the risk due to experience
and technical capability
̵ The private partner has a greater ability to negotiate with third parties so
as to pass through the risk to them at a reasonable or efficient price
̵ The private partner has a higher capacity to reduce the probability of the
occurrence of a risk
̵ The private partner has a higher capacity to mitigate the consequences of
the risk occurring and repairing the damage more efficiently
“When none of these factors are present, and the risk event has a significant potential
impact, that risk should be retained or taken back from the natural risk position”
“Exceptions may be identified on the basis of: (i) real precedents, (ii) knowledge and
experience of advisers or government’s own experience, and (iii) market
tests/discussion with interested parties”
Read examples of allocation in Table 5.3.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
103
#7 Contractual Categories of Risks
• From the standpoint of contract
• All need to be clearly defined including procedures for assessing and
conditions for accessing
Compensation
events
Relief events
Force majeure
5.7
• Private partner entitled to receive financial
compensation [and excused for breaching –
time & money]
• Restore the financial equation
• Full, partial / shared
• Excused for breaching (time)
• Compensation and relief
• Sometimes a legal term or defined as standard
• Relevance of legal traditions (see next slide)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
104
#7 Contractual Categories of Risks (2) - Force
majeure
5.7
• Legally defined concept in civil code countries
̵ Should not prevent the definition of a wider term or including specific risks
similar to force majeure when appropriate
• Parties agree on contract terms in common law jurisdictions,
including an exhaustive list of events in the contract
• Common ground - risk events that are, by their nature,
impossible to assess in terms of impact estimates, and very
difficult to estimate in terms of likelihood. They also always
relate to exogenous factors, are unrelated to the performance
of the private partner, and are caused by external agents (wars,
riots, natural disasters, and so on)
• Complementary reading - examples of definitions in table 5.4.
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
105
Quiz - Risk
16-Pick the incorrect statement
A. There are risks that should be taken back / not transferred as the transfer
will not generate VfM, i.e. the price for the risk to be charged by the private
can be higher than the value of the risk for the public if retained
B. “Best able to manage the risk” means greater ability to prevent, and/or
deal with consequences and/or better ability to price the risk accurately
C. Sometimes (in some countries depending on their level of development)
may be necessary to sacrifice VfM in favour of a reasonable level of
bankability
D. Options / strategies available to the private partner to deal with transferred
risk includes absorb the risk and rely on future negotiations if risk
eventuates, pass through the risk to contractors or pay for an insurance
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
106
Quiz - Risks identification / risk register
17-Which is NOT correct with respect to a risk register?
A. It is needed to conduct an organized qualitative assessment of
risks
B. It helps to identify and avoid blind spots, i.e. to be sure that all
potential risks are regarded
C. It is aimed to define and register the risk allocation
D. Allows for or help to handle potential overlaps
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
107
Quiz - Risk assessment - qualitative
18-Which approach is the correct approach or the most accurate
statement, considering a risk tolerability matrix of 3x3?
A. A risk with high potential impact but low likelihood could be ignored
as long as it is rare / unlikely that eventuates and the expected value
will be always low
B. A risk with medium potential impact and medium likelihood should
be prioritize
C. A risk with high likelihood but low potential impact will not be a
priority
D. Small / low impact means always no priority risk
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
108
Quiz - Risk assessment - quantitative
19-What is NOT true with respect to quantitative assessment?
A. As part of the exercise it is necessary to conduct a sensitivity
analysis to test the robustness of the Project
B. Is about estimating values of the possible outcomes or
“expected values” of risks
C. Values may be presented in the form of the most likely of
outcomes, or as a the full range of possible outcomes
D. It is commonly based in a base case constructed on the basis of
the most pessimistic or conservative project’s main cash flows
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
109
Quiz - Deciding on risk allocation
20-Which are NOT true with respect to risk allocation?
A. The default position on risk allocation is defined by the scope of
obligations and services considered and how and when will the
private partner be paid
B. Design, construction, commissioning, operations, maintenance,
revenues, and financial risks should be generally transferred to
private partner while risks related to responsibilities not naturally
embedded in the scope or revenue regime should be retained
C. Risks that are beyond the control and capability of the private
partner should be fully retained
D. Risks related to direct actions by the authority or government should
be always retained
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
110
Quiz - Contractual Categories of Risks
22-What best described the meaning of a compensation event?
A. A Force Majeure event
B. An event that if eventuates, the private partner will be excused for any
contract breach as he is consider to be impede to fulfil its obligations for a
reason out of his control
C. An event that if eventuates, private partner will have both the right to
receive a financial compensation to restore the originally expected financial
equation of the Project as well as being excused for any contract breach
D. An event that if eventuates, private partner will have only the right to
receive a financial compensation to restore the originally expected financial
equation of the Project, but will not be excused for entering into contract
breaches because that is Relief Events
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
112
#8 Main project risks and their potential allocation
(i) Related to design and construction phase – including site conditions
Risk
Description /impact
Public
Private Commnents / nuances / good practice
Land availability
and acquisition
Cause delays and indirect
cost overruns, direct cost
implication when
expropriations directly
managed by private
Environmental
assessment
An adverse assessment
may imply project changes
and therefore capex
overrun
X
Other permits
Mostly delay
X
Design risk
May cause delay/cost
overrun (capex and opex)
X
Construction risk
Risk of cost overrun
and/or delay in
construction (missing part
of scheduled revenues)
Completion and
commissioning
Failing to meet the
construction outcome as
prescribed – main impact
is in terms of time delay
[certain events
related to
unanticipated
ground conditions]
Like adverse geotechnical
conditions, archaeological
findings, utility relocation,
latent defects, squatters
Site (buildings) should be available at tender
launch. Linear, a significant part.
If expropriations managed by private, risk of cost
overrun should be retained (or shared with a cap)
X
(X)
5.8
Pre-existing contamination is a usual exception
and retained risk
Grantor should assume risk related to the
requirements
May also affect O&M phase
X
With certain exceptions described as specific
compensation and relief events (e.g. Force
Majeure)
X
Potential exceptions in terms of “interruptive”
unforeseen events (see below)– [which may cause
also direct cost overrun]
X
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
Depend on likelihood and potential impact and
reliability of information. Need to work/research
during appraisal. Treated as relief events and
some times as partial compensation / shared
events (avoid full financial relief)
#3 Risk structuring
113
Risk of Environmental Impacts
[Additional content – not examinable]
• The PPP Certification Guide says that environmental assessment risk is a
private sector risk. It goes on to say that:
̵ Environmental impacts have to be anticipated to the largest possible extent by the
authority in order to limit or mitigate this risk for the benefit of both parties. The
authority should remain responsible for adverse assessments related to the
specifications settled in the contract.
• What does this really mean?
Environmental Impact
Assessment
• Should be completed
by government and
approved prior to the
RFP being finalised
Specifications
• Should include
requirements based on
the environmental
approvals
• Government takes the
risk that the specifications
do not comply with the
approvals (particularly if
the approvals are not
finalised at the time of
tendering)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
Construction Phase
• The Private Partner
takes the risk of noncompliance with the
environmental
approvals as reflected
in the specification
114
#8 Main project risks and their potential allocation
(ii) During operating phase
Risk
Description /impact
Revenue risk in
user-pays
Revenue not being correctly
assessed /projected.
Mainly volume risk (also
applies to volume based
payment mech)
Subset: network risk and
competing facilities
[also fraud/non-payment]
Revenue riskinflation and
indexation
Revenue riskavailability and
quality
Risk of cost inflation
exceeding the price
revision/indexation
Not meeting performance
requirements / condition
criteria that produce
abatements or LDs
Other revenue risk
events
Such as credit/counterparty
risk, ancillary revenues,
forex, fraud
Maintenance and
operating costs
Correlated with design
especially as per renewals
Potential exceptions for
some items
Residual value and
hand-back
conditions
Public
(X)
Private
X
Comments / nuances / good practice
5.8
Is at the heart of user-pay structures.
Potential exception with sharing mechanisms through
minimum traffic / minimum revenue guarantees.
[appendix A: also excepting related to competing
facilities]
X
X
[with limited exceptions related to certain events
including mainly force majeure]
X
Potential qualifications/nuances regarding fraud / nonpayments by users (see appendix A)
X
Potential exceptions
- in ordinary O&M related to utilities/energy, some soft
services, insurance premia or inverse risk of usage
- technological enhancements (see changes in law)
X
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
115
#8 Main project risks and their potential allocation
(iii) Financial risks
Risk
Description /impact
Availability of
finance
Financing not being
available at commercial
close or before
construction starts or at
prohibitive conditions
Public
Private Comments / nuances / good practice
X
With some EMDE sharing by means of committing
public institutional finance
X
[typically insured by swaps or fixed rates]
Exception, in some countries, is interest base rate
volatility (from bid submission through financial
close)
Financial
costs/interest rate
Risk of fluctuations in
interest rate
Refinancing
Financial conditions at
refinancing being different
than expected
X
X
Shared to the extent that public party shares
benefits
Rarely sharing downside
Forex
In cross border financing
(X)
X
[In EMDEs that need access to cross border
finance, forex risk is sometimes assumed or
shared by the public – see chapter 1]
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#3 Risk structuring
5.8
116
#8 Main project risks and their potential allocation
(iv) Other risks both phases
Risk
Changes in law –
specific and
discriminatory
Description /impact
May impose additional
investment or affect ordinary
O&M
Changes in
services and
scope of works
Public
X
Private
X
X
Force majeure
(acts of god)
Natural disasters or other natural
events such as hurricanes,
earthquakes, storms, and so on –
producing loss or revenue/extra
costs/investments
Force majeure
(political risks)
Certain events of a political
nature with low likelihood but
unmeasurable effects such as
wars, terrorism, nuclear
contamination, and so on
X
Uninsurable risks
Potentially embedded in the force
majeure definition, and risks
which are required to be insured
but become uninsurable during
the course of the contract.
X
Early termination
The risk of the compensation sum
being insufficient to meet financial
obligations or being less than
expected
X
Comments / nuances / good practice
5.8
Any change in law that generally affects any business
should be borne by the private partner. Good practice
to establish risk sharing and limiting potential impact for
discriminatory changes in law (intended to affecting the
specific project – usually full compensation), and
specific changes in law (affecting only the specific
sector).
Contract should include clear rules to fully compensate
X
[Private to the extent of the insurance pack as required
in contract]
X
[Private to the extent of the insurance pack as required
in contract]
Some countries / some contracts include malicious
damage (and more exceptionally riots) under the force
majeure concept
In such circumstances, the contract should provide
relief from the obligation of being insured
X
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
It is important for the authority since a compensation
method perceived as unfair or unbalanced, or
ambiguous, may involve losing bids or even no-bids
situation.
#3 Risk structuring
117
4
Other matters
Guide Sections
#9.9
118
Contents
Objectives and
overview of the
Phase
• Objectives & where we are in the Process Cycle
• Overview of the Structuring Phase
• Summary Description of Main Tasks to be Carried Out in thus Phase
Financial
Structuring (from
the Public
Perspective)
• Elements of FS and competing objectives
• Term Definition
• Pure Co-financing
• Public Loans: Hard or Soft Public Agency Loans
• Filling the Viability Gap of a User-Pays Project
• Equity Participation by the Government
• Other Ways to Increase Financial Feasibility and Affordability
• Categories of Revenue Regimes in PPP Projects
• Financial Structuring Matters in User-Pays Projects
• Volume-Linked Payment Mechanisms
• Availability Payments
Risk Allocation and
Structuring
[Other matters]
• Defining Risk: The Risk Management Cycle
• Risk Identification
• Risk Assessment
• Mitigation Measures (early mitigation by the authority)
• Deciding on Risk Allocation
• Contractual Categories of Risks: Compensation, Relief, and Force Majeure Events
• Introducing the Main Project Risks and their Potential Allocation
• Incorporating Risk Allocation into the Contract: General Comments
• Early termination
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#4 Other matters
119
#9.9. Early termination contract provisions
Reasons for termination
9.9
Termination for
convenience or
“unilateral termination”
and termination for fault
by the public partner
Termination for force
majeure
Termination for default of
the private partner
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#4 Other matters
120
#9.9. Early termination contract provisions
Consequences / calculating the compensation
Termination for
convenience
Termination due to
force majeure or
similar situations
Termination by default
of the private partner
9.9
• Grants the private partner rights to full compensation
• Recover all funds invested
• Costs of breaking its contracts with third parties
• Opportunity costs of the equity investment
• Grants the private partner rights to recover all investments in full
• Some countries/contracts also recognize the right to a positive
equity IRR at a pre-agreed rate, usually to obtain a close to 0%
equity IRR in real terms
• Grants the private partner (or lenders) rights to receive a
compensation sum
• Different approaches: Book value; Debt-based compensation;
Market value/market sale
• Procuring authority agrees a replacement partner with lenders
(prohibited in some jurisdictions)
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#4 Other matters
121
Example: Termination Payment Calculations
Source: Department of Treasury and Finance (Victoria,
Australia), Partnerships Victoria Template - Termination
Payments Schedule
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
122
Quiz - Early Termination
23-Which one is correct with respect to early termination scenarios?
A.
B.
C.
D.
When a contract is early terminated because a Force Majeure event, the private
partner should be entitled to receive a compensation sum that allows the partner to
repay all debts and costs of breaking contracts, recoup all the equity investment and
enjoy an equity IRR similar to the one originally expected, because the event was
beyond his control so thee partner should not suffer any harm
When a contract is early terminated unilaterally by the grantor, the private partner
should be entitled to receive a compensation sum that allows him to repay all debts
and costs of breaking contracts, recoup all the equity investment and enjoy an
equity IRR similar to the one originally expected, because the procuring authority
should assume the consequences of its decisions
When a contract is terminated by the default of the private partner there is never a
compensation for the private partner as a consequence for defaulting materially its
obligations
in a default termination
The usual approaches to calculate the compensation sum are: book value, debtbased compensation, market value/market sale and an expert opinion
© K-Infra & Foster Infrastructure 2020 | Structuring & Drafting (Preparation)
#4 Other matters
123
Contact
Andres Rebollo
arebollo@k-infrastructure.com
Richard Foster
richard@fosterinfrastructure.com
This material is intellectual property of Knowledge Infrastructure
and Foster Infrastructure.
It may be only used by the client referred to on the front page of
the document.
Dissemination of this material to any third party other than the
client is not allowed.
In collaboration with
Download